Home

2Wire 8113P487-60 Two-Way Radio User Manual

1. 5 Press Enter To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings just remember Light light ens and Dark darkens to keep it straight NOTE You can change the default setting for Contrast See Accessing the default scan settings on page 12 7 SCANNING 5 3 Document type Select the document type you want to scan NOTE This function is not available when scanning a color document Text Select this when scanning text documents Auto Select this when scanning documents containing photographs or drawings with text Photo Select this when scanning photographs or drawings Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press Doc Type Scan Ready sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 1003 Address Ji omens 4 Select the desired document type Scan Ready Select the document type and press Enter Document Type Back Enter This mode allows the machine to know what type of document is being scanned 5 Press Enter NOTE You can change the default setting for Doc Typel See Accessing the default scan settings on page 12 7 5 4 SCANNING Sean size You can change the document scan size prior to scanning The machine scans the range of the document according to the selected size It will start scanning at the front side of the document which may eliminate or cut off the backside of the scanned document Press SCAN on th
2. e Enter the e mail address manually See page 4 2 or e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 _or e Use the call group dialing See page 2 14 NOTE Press Location to review or delete the selected destinations For details see Reviewing or deleting selected destinations on next page 6 Press Start NOTE To cancel the broadcast transmission press Fax Cancel Job Confirm For details of fax canceling see Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands e If you frequently broadcast documents to the same destinations use the call group dialing for added convenience See page 2 14 FAXING 3 25 Reviewing or deleting selected destinations Before pressing Start you can review the broadcast destinations or delete a speci fied destination s 0 Location display Location is displayed when you send fax or e mail using the following methods e Broadcast transmissions e After entering fax numbers manually e After entering e mail addresses manually e After selecting an address book number Help Displays the descrip tion of keys in the Location display ions and select Enter Delete t Page Up A Press this key after se lecting the destination to delete clones minc com key after selecting TE lee ae e mail address it sorts in the order of To w003 Carl Faris Office Ce Bec 2 Pag
3. ADF Control panel 2nd paper cassette Option x Ll FF Gi ef lt Z Document Document e tray Document LO exit tray 2nd side cover 1st side cover Front cover Platen cover Telephone Connectors PHONE PHONE ka Second phone line Option USB connector Network connector Paper level Indicator o glass is available only for the MFX 2030 MFX 1430 Pa Document glass Paper exit tray AC power jack Power switch 1 2 GETTING STARTED Control panel overview Display Contrast This adjusts the brightness of the display 2 Mode keys Press these keys to toggle between modes The key will be highlighted after it is pressed 3 Online Shows whether or not the PC printing function is available For details of PC printing see the PDF manual on the Printer amp Scanner Manual CD 4 Alarm lamp Lights when an error occurs 5 Comm lamp Lights when the machine is communicating with another machine 6 Memory Receive lamp Lights when the machine is out of paper and documents are being stored into memory 7 Display Displays machine status interactive displays and touch keys for selecting all functions 8 Setting Press this key to view edit machine default settings O Reset Returns the menu to the standby mode and resets all settings back to their defaults 10 Energy Save Press this to put the machine into the energy save mode and reduce
4. Manual will appear if you made a fax call using an external telephone Setting the activity journal Your fax machine will print the activity journal automatically after 100 transac tions NOTE Either Tx Report or Rx Report cannot be printed out automatically Press Setting Management Auto Print Journal Management Select item to edit Prev lof 3b Net Energy Save Mode uto Print Journal OFF 2 Select ON and press Enter Management Select ON OFF and press Enter Auto Print Journal Back Enter REPORT amp Lists 13 5 REPORT amp LISTS WW Printing the activity journal manually To print an activity journal immediately without waiting for 100 transmissions to be completed Press Setting List Journal List List select an item to print Address Journal settings e Lists Settings Shortcut Shortcut 2 Press Journal Report Journal List select an item to print Journal List Report 3 Select the journal type you want to print e Tx Report prints fax internet fax scan to e mail transmission reports only e Rx Report prints fax internet fax scan to e mail reception reports only e Tx amp Rx Report prints both fax internet fax scan to e mail transmission and reception reports 4 When the confirmation message appears press Yes to print it 13 6 REPORT amp LISTS Setting the order on the activity journal Your machine will li
5. Open the front cover To clean the drum charge wire pull the blue rod toward you making sure it fully extends Then return the rod to its original position See page 14 4 The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective Remove the cartridges and check them for damage If the problem persists replace either or both of the cartridges as indicated Printouts have toner smudges The document glass is dirty Wipe the document glass with a dry soft cloth The document pad is dirty Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened and a mild detergent The drum charge wire may be dirty Open the front cover To clean the drum charge wire pull the blue rod toward you making sure it fully extends Then return the rod to its original position See page 14 4 The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective Remove the cartridges and check them for damage If the problem persists replace either or both of the cartridges as indicated If you find smudges on the back of the printouts the transport roller may be dirty Your machine normally cleans the transport roller automatically If other solutions fail please contact your Muratec dealer The image is not aligned prop The document is not positioned correctly erly on the paper Correctly adjust the document guides for the size of the document Fe The ADF glass is dirty while using the ADF Wipe the ADF glass with a dry soft cloth See page 14 2 The docu
6. gt 1sided Wy AN e If you set an advanced functions proceed to step 5 e If you do not set an advanced function proceed to step 7 5 Press Advance CoPYING 7 19 COPYING 6 1 Press Bind to set the document bind position e Press DuplexCopy to return to the duplex copy display Not displayed if the duplex printing unit is not installed DuplexCopy Adjust settings and select Enter To go back select DuplexCopy 2 gt 1sided Doc Direction 2 Press Right amp Left or Top DuplexCopy select the document bind position and press Enter 1 pentalet 3 Press Enter 7 Press Enter twice to return to the standby display Press Reset to cancel the duplex copy settings 8 Press Start The front side of the duplex document will be scanned Q When the following display is shown place the backside of the duplex docu ment in the same direction as the front side and press Start e Press Stop to cancel e Be sure to set the document in the correct direction See the table on page 7 16 Set duplex document set duplex doc Memory ga Next Loading Direction es Paame 7 20 COPYING Duplex copying of a duplex document 2 2 This mode will convert two sided originals into two sided documents The duplex printing unit is required Set the front side of the duplex document in the ADF 2 Press Copy to display the Copy standby mode 3 Press Others
7. 6 Use the numeric keys to enter the sub address e The sub address can contain up to 20 characters and or Funct ion Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub address and select Enter F Code Tx Sub Address 123456 189_ lt e ccs 7 Press Enter 8 Use the numeric keys to enter the password e The password can contain up to 20 characters and or o If the remote machine s F code Box has not been set a passcode do not enter any character Function If a password is required enter the password and select Enter F Code Tx Password 11221122_ lt e ccs Q Press Enter to return to the display in step 4 e When performing a delayed transmission press Delayed Tx and proceed to step 6 of Delayed transmissions See page 10 15 10 Press Enter to complete the entry 1 Press Enter again to finish the registration To return to the standby mode press Reset SPECIAL FEATURES 10 17 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O F code polling 6 Use the numeric keys to enter the sub address number e The sub address can contain up to 20 characters and or Function Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub address and select Enter F Code Polling Sub Address Back Enter 123456 890_ CEES 7 Press Enter 8 Use the numeric keys to enter the password e The password can contain up to 20 characters and or Function If a password is required enter the password and sele
8. Deleting department codes Press Setting Management Next Depart Management Delete 2 Select the department code you want to delete Delete Select a number to delete 001 Domestic Sales O02 Equipment 3 Press Yes to delete Press No to return to step 2 without deleting the number Delete Select a number to delete O02 Equipment Would you like to delete 4 To delete another department code repeat the procedures from step 2 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 11 16 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE Turning department management On Press Setting Management Next Depart Management Setting 2 Press Copy to set the department management status for copying and or press Fax for faxing ON and OFF will toggle each time you press the key To use department management set it to ON setting select item to edit Using department codes To use this function make sure e The department code has been registered e Each user department knows their department code Transmitting faxes Set the document See page 1 25 2 Press Fax to display the Fax standby mode 3 Specify the destination 4 Press Start 5 Use A YV or the numeric keys to enter the department code Fax Re ady Fax Ready Mode Enter the department code and select Enter Depart Management Back Enter Input range UUQU00000 999999994 a 000044500 E 6 Pres
9. Reserved Copy 02 09 26 Printing 7 28 COPYING Chapter PC Fax function DT Sie US the drive ce a cts teres tone aed aides astde seictee ap cee tedapatnioheasiuaeensdeasdontes 8 2 Sending a PC 11 erates nuececactsneeeaisacueseniaaicosaotsecesigaceonieveyapeauiaeesaradenepianecase 8 3 You can send a document from a PC application to a remote fax machine or e mail location This process allows you to save time and reduce the paper consumption in your office Installing the driver In order to perform a PC fax you need to have the PC FAX driver installed on your PC The PC FAX driver is located on the CD supplied with your machine For more information on how to install the driver refer to the Network Printer Manual located on the CD 8 2 PC F Ax FUNCTION Sending a PC fax After the PC FAX driver is installed on your PC you can send a document directly from your PC to a remote fax machine or e mail inbox The following steps provide the basic procedure for sending a PC fax Verify that your machine is properly connected to the computer and the power has been turned on 9 Verify that you have installed the fax driver on your computer 3 Start the desired application program and create open a document 4 Click Print from the File menu Make sure that Muratec Fax is selected as the printer indicates your machine s model name ex Muratec F 520 FAX If you want
10. Specifying the document size to copy If the document size exceeds the size set only the default scan range will be copied To insure that your job is scanned properly please adjust the scan range Set the document 2 1 Press COPY to display the Copy standby mode 2 Press Others 3 Press Doc Size NOTE You can assign Doc Size to the soft key See Soft keys on pages 10 2 to 10 6 4 1 Select the size of the document to be copied Copy Functions Select the document size and press Enter Document Size ff Back Enter COPYING BA 2 Press Enter twice 5 Press Start COPYING 7 27 Checking the copy print queue If a job is scanned while another job is printing that job will be reserved in the copy print queue The copy will be printed based on the order in which it was scanned In addition if the toner or paper runs out while copying copy reservation can be used in the same way if the job has not been completed Press Setting Management Next Display Jobs in Queue Management Select item toa edit Prev 4 2of3 Nert Journal Line Up DFF Depart Management Display me Copy Protect DFF 2 Press Reserved Copy Display Jobs in Queue select item to edit Reserved Document Copy The numberestatus of jobs in queue can be checked 3 This shows the jobs currently in the queue Press Reset to return to the standby mode Display Jobs in Queue
11. The number of the You browsed a folder where too many files or folders are located To scan to the folder browse results exceeds register the folder as a shortcut using the Keypad or select another folder To attach the limit files from the folder copy the files to a new folder and attach them The numeric keypad You cannot use numeric keys while selecting group members cannot be used The storing process has The machine cannot execute the job until the current job finishes Please wait not finished The toner is empty Toner is empty Replace with a new toner bottle The toner is low Your machine is almost out of toner Please contact your Muretec dealer soon to purchase a new toner cartridge The value entered You entered a value or number that exceeds the range Confirm the range on the display exceeds the limit Please and enter it again enter a value within the listed range There are no vacant You have already registered 300 locations to the Address Book To register a new loca numbers tion first delete the unnecessary locations first There is no applicable You selected a key on the index to which no destination is categorized data This function cannot be You selected a function that is currently not available Change the function you set prior used to this function or cancel this function This Resolution cannot You try to set a resolution that is not available in the set zoom ratio Change either the
12. To print the list press Setting List Other Lists Program One Touch then Yes Fax Forward List Lists the each transfer rule s identifier number remote fax s number where you want documents to be transferred ON OFF setting time period and auto print setting To print a program list press Setting List Other Lists Fax Forward then Yes Cover Page Prints a sample cover page To print this list press Setting List Other Lists Cover Pagel then Yes Batch Tx Doc List Lists the box names and the documents file numbers To print this list press Setting List Other Lists Batch Tx Doc then Yes Batch Tx Box List Lists each box name address book number and fax number and day and time the transmission should start To print this list press Setting List Other Lists Batch Tx Box Department List then Yes F Code Box List Lists each box s identifier number box name if any sub address password box type and each box s settings To print this list press Setting List Other Lists F Code Box then Yes F Code Doc List Lists the each box s identifier number box name if any box type and each file number or document number that is stored To print this list press Setting List Other Lists F Code Doc then Yes Block Junk Fax List Lists blocked phone numbers To print this list press Setting List Other Lists Blo
13. continuance of service may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with the equipment MFX 2030 MFX 14380 F 560 F 520 see operating instructions for details For further repair or warranty information please contact Muratec Customer Support Center at 800 347 3296 from the U S only If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for infor mation If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of the MFX 2030 MFX 1430 F 560 F 520 does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equip ment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer This equipment is hearing aid comp
14. Enter Fax Number N23456789_ co 2 Press Enter 6 Press Start FAXING 3 45 Block junk fax Your machine s Block Junk Fax feature lets you bar the gates against unauthorized incoming faxes Junk fax But before you block junk fax first understand how this feature works to determine if it is right for you There are four possible settings for Block Junk Fax e Off The feature is not activated e Model Your machine checks whether the last four digits of any phone number in your address book match the last four digits of the remote fax s phone number If it does not find a match your machine will disconnect the call e Mode2 This mode rejects any call from a number whose last four digits match any number in the blocked numbers list Your machine can hold up to 50 blocked numbers e Mode3 This mode rejects numbers that are not in the address book and also rejects numbers that are in the blocked numbers list This mode lets you keep a number on your address book for transmitting while still blocking incoming calls by putting it on the blocked numbers list But before you activate the Block Junk Fax feature please consider o Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers on their machine With Block Junk Fax activated your machine would reject faxes from these machines e Access codes can cause confusion If an address book entry ends with an extra code such as lon
15. F Code Tx OFF OFF OFF OM JC JCS Options Address Subject Batch Scan FileFormat When All tab is selected The last destination that you sent to will be displayed NOTE Press Location to review or delete the specified destinations e Press To to toggle between To Cc and Bcc 5 Press Start INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 4 3 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS Mail History The latest 20 e mail addresses that you manually entered and sent to will be dis played You may select a number to send to E mail addresses will not repeat on the list even if the address has been sent to multiple times Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2 4 Press Mail History Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode ep 2b Memory 100 al Resolution Search Add Edit E H002 Mike London Office i W af i fate EROOS Carl Paris Office Story When All tab is selected 5 1 Select the e mail address you want to send to Mail History select the address to resend to and press Enter Prev 4 iof am ext Ol mpolanski aal com Uf ehil l spcarsrus com NOTE Up to 20 e mail addresses will be listed with the most recent communication listed first 4 4 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS The selected destination will be displayed Mail Address Enter the recipient s e mail address and select Enter Entry Limit 177
16. K Beiling Office 009 Chang K Beijing Office ER010 Taro H Tokvo Office P 011 Harry N Sales Dep Press the destination you want to add to the group and press Enter 7 Press Start e If you want to cancel the a transmission that is in progress use the Review Commands feature See Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands on page 6 1 2 18 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK Making a phone call Besides entering the destination directly you can simply search the destination name registered in the address book to make a phone call There are various searching methods such as alpha group or numeric How to dial using the address book NOTE When using Monitor press FAX to display to the Fax standby mode Connect the optional handset or an external phone to your machine to make a phone call Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Lift the handset Or press Fax tab Monitor 3 Specify the destination A Numeric keys Press the numeric keys to enter the destination number B Address Book 1 1 Press Address Book 2 Use the numeric keys or A Y to enter the address book number Tel Mode Use the numeric keypad or arrow keys to enter the address book location and select Enter Address Book Back Enter Input range 001 300 d001 Sam New York Office This will send to a pre registered address book location 3 Press Enter C Address Book 2 Specify the desti
17. Stop to discharge the remaining documents 7 2 COPYING Making copies Making copies 1 Set the document See page 1 25 2 Press COPY to display the Copy standby mode 3 If neccessary adjust the copy settings See Basic copy settings on page 7 8 To clear the settings press Reset 4 Press Start To stop copying press Stop Setting the next document The next document can be set when performing Sort Copy See page 7 13 Com bined Copy See page 7 14 Card Copy See page 7 25 in order to scan a different document The default setting for this mode is NO when using the ADF and Yes when using the document glass When using the ADF Set the document in the ADF See page 1 25 2 Set Sort Copy Combine Copy 3 Press Start Scanning Scan Pages 1 PrintPages 1 Copies 1 1 Memory ggz COPYING B PrintPages 1 Copies 17 Memory gg 5 When the document has been scanned set the next document COPYING 7 3 6 Press Next Doc The next document will be scanned e The Next Doc setting can be deleted by pressing Complete e To scan another document press Yes while the document is scanning Set next document Set next doc Memory qq s When using the document glass Set the document on the document glass See page 1 25 2 Set Sort Copy Combine Copy Card Copy 3 Press Start Memory 100 e Pressing No during document scanning will start the copying of all do
18. in XXXX tray The drum is low Your drum will need to be replaced soon Please contact your Muratec dealer to pur chase a new drum cartridge The following data is The fax number or e mail address is not registered to the Address Book Either fax required number or e mail address must be registered Fax or e mail The following data is The fax number with PIN number or e mail address is not registered to the Address required Book in PIN mask mode 1 Either fax number or e mail address must be registered For fax numbers the PIN number must also be entered after entering the fax number and an asterisk MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Fax or e mail PIN number n The LDAP server can The advanced search failed due to an internal machine error Check the LDAP server not be found Check the setting again and try the search again For more information about LDAP server set LDAP server settings up refer to the Network Guide The NetBIOS name The NetBIOS name conflicts with other device Contact your Network Administrator entered is already in use The number of file You can add up to 10 network files or up to 10 MB worth of files to the scanned job attachments and or Delete files so that it meets the limit file size limit has been exceeded Please delete attachments until you reach the acceptable limit MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 21 Message on the display Description Solution
19. on page 10 17 Delayed transmissions Delayed transmissions can be combined with any of the other three operations 6 Use A V lt gt Jor the numeric keys to register the transmission time e If 00 is set for the day the communication will start on the day set for the programmable one touch Funct ion Use the arrows or numeric keypad to adiust the time setting and select Enter Delayed Transmission Back Hf Enter Day Hour Minute cic Press Enter to return to the display in step 5 on page 10 15 When combining this operation with another operation proceed to register the next operation SPECIAL FEATURES 10 15 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O 8 When you finished the registrastion press Enter Prog One Touch Enter location and select Others to set functions To go back select Back aroun Tx i Options B Ganie To return to the standby mode press Reset Polling reception 6 Press ON Funct ion Select ON OFF and press Enter This mode will allow you to retrieve a document from a remote fas machine 7 Press Enter to return to the display in step 5 o If performing a delayed transmission press Delayed Tx and proceed to step 6 of Delayed transmissions See page 10 15 8 Press Enter to complete the entry Q Press Enter again to finish the registration To return to the standby mode press Reset 10 16 SPECIAL FEATURES F code transmission
20. select the number to redial and press Enter 02 2222 2222 03 3999 3393 O4 4dad dada Redial Enter the recipient s fax number and select You can edit the number if necessary 6 Press Enter 7 Press Start NOTE You can register the destination in the Address Book from the display in step 5 1 Press Register 2 Following the steps from step 4 in Alternative 2 Registering or editing the fax number using the numeric keys For details see page 2 8 3 14 FAXING Receiving a fax Selecting the reception mode 1 Press Setting User Install Reception Model 2 Select your desired reception mode User Install Select the reception mode and press Enter Reception Mode Back ff Enter Fax Tel Fax Fax Tel ERM heady Model Ready Mode Ready Model Ready Mode Your machine has five different reception modes e Fax Ready Mode see Automatic reception mode on next page e Tel Fax Ready Mode see Automatic reception mode on next page e Fax Tel Ready Mode see Automatic reception mode on next page e Ans Fax Ready Mode see Automatic reception mode on next page e Tel Ready Mode see Manual reception mode below 3 Press Enter to save the setting 4 Press Reset to exit Manual reception mode Tel Ready Mode Use it if e You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls e You mainly receive phone calls In this mode Your machine ne
21. you can reduce the time Lighter and effort required when making changes Normal Darker Darkest TTI Set to ON to send the TTI information ON ON and OFF toggle every time you press TTI OFF ON Memory Tx This sets whether to give the priority to memory transmission or to real time transmis ON See page 3 5 sions when sending faxes Memory transmissions are prioritized when ON is set and OFF real time transmissions when OFF is set You can also select to give the priority to memory transmissions or to real time transmis sions each time you send a fax ON and OFF toggle every time you press Memory Tx Cover Page Set to ON to add a cover page containing a simple message to every fax ON See page 3 32 ON and OFF toggle every time you press Cover Page OFF Tx Report Set to ON to print out a transmission report for each fax ON See page 13 8 ON and OFF toggle every time you press Tx Report OFF Overseas Tx Set to ON to enable the overseas transmission all the time ON ON and OFF toggle every time you press OverseasTx OFF Accessing other fax settings Press Setting Fax Settings 2 Press Other Settings 3 Set or change the selected items Other Settings Select jtem to edit Redial Interval 1 Min For details on each setting refer to the following table 4 When you finish press Reset to return to the standby mode MACHINE SETTINGS 12 5 1 MACHINE SET
22. 1 UserName Password Q Enter link then press Enter Begin your entry with The slash in found in the Symbol menu To switch back to the alphabet press Alpha Link Enter the Link and select Enter Entry Limit 0 100 3 SCANNING Select a number to enter edit Shortcut Name FTP Shortcut 1 Link f FTPI DEMO UserName Password gt SCANNING 5 51 Enter the user name then press Enter The user name can contain up to 50 characters All ASCII characters are avail able UserName Enter the user name and select Emeri Entry Limit 12 Press Password Select a number to enteredit Shortcut Name FTP Shortcut 1 Link nA FTRT DEMO UserName MURATEC Password 13 Enter the password then press Enter The password can contain up to 32 characters All ASCII characters are avail able Password Enter the password and select Enter Entry Limit NOTE The entered password is displayed using asterisks 5 52 SCANNING 14 Press Enter m0 Select a number to enter edit Enter Shortcut Name FTF Shortcut nA FTP DEMO UserName MURATEC Password ROR 15 If you want to register another shortcut repeat procedure from step 5 16 To return to the standby mode press Reset NOTE We recommend you to test your registered FTP Shortcut by sending something soon after your have registered it It is the best way to verify that the
23. 1 10 Box Name Entry Limit Box Name New York Office 3 Press Enter Enter the ITU T password and hold time as necessary 10 24 SPECIAL FEATURES O Entering a password 1 Press Password 2 Enter the password using the numeric keys then press Enter e Up to 20 digits can be entered for passwords Numerals and can be entered e This is the password for ITU T compatible F Code fax transactions You do not need to have a password for the F Code box However using a password will make your F Code communications more secure Password 123456 189_ La Je JL steer O Setting the hold time The hold time is the period 0 to 31 days for which documents in the security box are retained Documents are retained indefinitely when 00 days has been set 1 Press Hold time 2 Enter the hold time using A V or the numeric keys then press Enter Secure Box Enter hold time dE i Input range 00 3 03 Day S Enter U0 to skip time setting 12 To register another F code box press Enter then repeat from step 2 of Regis tering or editing an F code box on page 10 22 Press Reset to return to the standby mode SPECIAL FEATURES 10 25 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O U If you setup a Bulletin box 5 Press Bulletin Box 6 Use the numeric keys to enter the sub address This is the numerical identifier you must enter in order to communicate with any remote F code compati
24. 100 mm 40 inches y 100 mm y 40 inches 713 mm 813 mm 181 inches 221 inches 872 mm 772 mm 344 inches 304 inches T N YV 50 mm i 50 mm 20 inches l 753 mm 297 inches L4 20 inches gt 853 mm 337 inches NOTE In order to enable easy machine maintenance and replacement of consumables maintain an adequate amount of space around the machine When lifting the machine be sure to grab the handles on the left and right sides of the cassette tray General precautions Never disassemble your machine Disassembling your machine can cause serious injury to you and damage to your machine If service is required contact your Muratec dealer During electrical storms disconnect the plug from the outlet Electrical storms can cause electrical shock or damage to the machine S l 7 Keep your machine dry and away from liquids Keep liquids and metal pins or other objects away from your machine If something falls into the machine immediately turn OFF the power switch unplug the power cord from the power outlet and then contact your Muratec dealer Do not put anything on or over the electrical power cord and do not route the power cord under rugs or carpets Doing so can damage the power cord and or the machine causing fire or electrical shock Transpo
25. 4 sending ceccceecceseceseceeeceesecenes 3 9 Memory overflow message 3 4 7 2 Memory transmission 06 3 3 S12 010 0 oa nee ene ener 3 5 3 6 N Next document setting 7 3 Out of paper reception 3 18 Overseas transmission 3 43 D Page counters actidccsassiceserstieances 10 39 Paper handling cceeceeeees 1 26 acceptable paper sizes 1 26 paper type setting 1 30 Paper jams cossnsupisecosseansensaesunee 14 13 Paper settings ccccecceeceeeeees 12 14 Paper SIZE sermonis 7 11 Passcode protection 0008 11 2 Phone call semerci 2 19 call fails sscosseuptectonwieeecenddecttou 2 20 AI 6 APPENDIX amp INDEX how to dial sseissrecnrinarssrroiss 2 19 how tO receive ccceeeecee sees 2 20 optional handset volume 2 20 speaker volume 000008 2 21 PIN masking ceecee 11 7 Polling reception ssec 3 50 Polling transmission 6 3 42 Print quality problems 14 30 Program one touch 06 10 14 Q Quick memory transmission 3 3 12 6 QWERTY keypad eee 1 10 R Re mail sete peccseestice nessees tanec 4 3 5 22 Real time transmission 3 4 sending sccisdsecerdoncseuiveseretsivesacesss 3 8 Receive time stamp 00668 12 6 Redialing ccccccccesceeeeceeeeeeeees 3 13 automat
26. Address Book List Lists the address book numbers names and fax number e mail addresses you have stored To print this list press Setting List Address Book then Yes Group List Lists the address book numbers name and fax number e mail address you have stored into group To print this list press Setting List Group then select the group name and press Yes Command List Lists the following items e Command number e Address book numbers fax numbers and e mail addresses of the destination e Start time dd hh mm format e Note The specified functions are printed To print this list press Setting List Journal List Command List then Yes Tx Report You can print the transmission report for the fax internet fax e mail transmission To print the report press Setting List Journal List Journal Report Tx Report then Yes Rx Report You can print the reception report for the fax internet fax e mail reception To print the report press Setting List Journal List Journal Report Rx Report then Yes Tx amp Rx You can print the transmission and reception report for the latest 100 Report fax transaction and latest 100 internet fax e mail transaction To print the report press Setting List Journal List Journal Report Tx amp Rx Report then Yes Copy Settings List Lists the current copy settings To print this list press Setting List Sett
27. DuplexCopy NOTE You can assign DuplexCopy to the soft key See Soft keys on pages 10 2 to 10 6 4 Press 2 gt 2 sided Copy Functions select the duplex copy method and press Enter Duplex Cony Method OFF 2 gt sided o If you set an advanced function proceed to step 5 e If you do not set an advanced function proceed to step 7 5 Press Advance COPYING i 6 1 Press Bind to set document bind position e Press DuplexCopy to return to the duplex copy display Dup lexCopy Adjust settings and select Enter To go back select DuplexCopy 2 Asi ded Doc Direction CoPYING 7 21 2 Press Right amp Left or Top DuplexCopy select the document bind position and press Enter SL Heulen 3 Press Enter 7 Press Enter twice to return to the standby mode Press Reset to cancel the duplex copy settings 8 Press Start Scan the front side of the duplex document Q When the following display is shown set the document in the correct direction and press Start See the table on page 7 17 e Press Stop to cancel e Be sure to set the document in the correct direction See the table on page 7 17 Set duplex document set duplex doc Memory Jp Next Loading Direction Cen Len 7 22 COPYING Duplex copying of a one sided document 1 2 The duplex printing unit is required Set the document 2 Press COPY to display the Cop
28. FileFormat When All tab is selected Now the memory transmission is set to OFF NOTE You can assign Memory Tx to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 e You can change the default setting for Memory Tx See Accessing the default settings on page 12 4 5 Specify the destination e Use the numeric keys to dial the number _or e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 Press Reset to cancel the settings NOTE With real time transmission you can dial only one destination When you select multiple destinations real time transmission will be disabled 6 Press Start e To cancel the transmission use Review commands features see Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands 3 8 FAXING Manual transmission non memory transmission Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Fax tab 4 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2 5 Press Monitor Lift the handset if you have connected an optional handset or an external tele phone to your machine In either case the following display will appear Volune Search Add Edit Ls E 4 001 San New York Office i O02 Mike London Office Redial inane i O03 Carl Paris Office o at pol 4 z WRG Od Beth Chicazo Office a E005 Chang Beij ing Office be 6 Specify the destination e Use the n
29. Legal 8 5 x 14 sore Press or until your desired ratio is displayed 50 to 200 for the document glass 50 to 100 for the ADF Scan Functions Use the numeric keypad or arrow keys to adjust the zoom ratio and select Enter Enter your desired ratio using the numeric keys 6 Press Enter 5 58 SCANNING Batch scanning When the Batch Scan function is on it means that all scanned pages will be saved as one file If you turn this function off each scanned page will be saved as an indi vidual file Here is how Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press Others 4 Press Batch Scan Scan Functions Select item to edit Program 1002 Letter OFF Dup lexScar EEk FileFormat AE teForne tht tachment Address e mai Mail Cee NOTE You can assign Batch Scan to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 5 Press OFF Scan Functions Select ON OFF and press Enter Batch Scan Ba E JN All scanned pages will be saved as one Tile OFF Each scanned page will be saved as an individual file 6 Press Enter NOTE If you are scanning color documents and select JPEG as the file format batch scanning will not be possible Each scanned page will be saved as an individual JPEG If you select batch scan when sending documents to an e mail address all of the scanned pages will appear as individual files but they will be sent in o
30. Name select the file name to enter edit Prev lof 2m Next 5 Enter or edit the file name then press Enter The name can contain up to 20 characters Refer to page 5 6 for available char acters Enter the file name and select Enter Entry Limit Fi e Name ABCDEFG 6 To return to the Standby mode press Reset 5 8 SCANNING Scan to e mail Sending a document by e mail You can send a hardcopy document to an e mail inbox Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail Select Scan Destination Sep 6 2005 02 15pm Memory 1003 4 Adjust any scan settings or set any advanced functions For more information about those functions see Before scanning on pages 5 2 to 5 8 and Advanced functions on pages 5 56 to 5 66 5 To insert a text message into your e mail see pages 5 24 to 5 27 6 Press Mail Address Scan Ready sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 100 ResolutioniilSearch 2U0dp if Norma lg Doc Type ff Auto OFF AS Mail Address omens 7 Use the QWERTY keypad or numeric keys to enter the e mail address The address may contain up to 50 characters Mail Address Enter the recipient s e mail address and select Enter Entry Limit O K SCANNING 5 9 SCANNING oO To enter symbols press Symbol To delete a character press lt 4 gt to move the cursor to the character you want to delete and press Delete For more inf
31. Office Page change keys Displays the destina Broadcast BO02 Mike London Office Press this to change a tions in alphabetical OFF or group or numeric order See page 2 3 es 3 th iew Mai _ _ E003 Carl Paris Office Pepe Histo Destination Othels Al Page number This allows you to Currently displayed review to destinations When All tab is selected page total pages you have selected reg istered 5 destinations are displayed at a Tabs The registered destinations are listed by the sending method Press a tab to display the classified destinations Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode dane ce a Sep 26 20 Memory 100 Add Edit fortrast E001 Sam New York Office is Normal p A002 MikesLondon Office Broadcast 1 OFF 1003 Car Paris Office fail Nites o0d beth chicasa Office Mail jf nee Pag ictory 005 Chang Beij ing Office bay When Fax tab is selected When e mail tab is selected 27 USING THE ADDRESS Book Index Symbol When you press this key only the destination names starting with a symbol or number are displayed Group Lists the registered group names e ABC to WXYZ When you press one of these keys only the destination names starting with the selected alpha characters will be displayed BL Special dialing characters You can enter special dialing cha
32. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MURATEC BE LIABLE TO THE CUSTOMER OR TO ANY USER FOR ANY DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EXPENSES LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE MURATEC PRODUCT EVEN IF MURATEC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages and some States do not allow limitations on how long an implied war ranty lasts so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you This war ranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from State to State Precautions Installation precautions Keep you machine clean Dust buildup can damage your machine However do not use a dust cover which can cause overheating Periodically clean your machine as instructed in this manual To avoid overheating set up the machine away from direct sunlight or heating unit To avoid damage to the machine or personal injury set the machine up in a level vibration free location Your machine uses a standard modular telephone jack The power cord is about 6 5 feet long when stretched to its limit and the power cord should never be stretched to its limit Many appliances and office equipment including televisions radios copy machines air conditio
33. See page 2 12 e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page 3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 7 Press Start NOTE To change the sending time after it has been set you need to cancel the delayed transmission command and start over e To cancel the delayed command press Fax Cancel Job Confirm For details of fax canceling see Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands 3 34 FAXING Batch transmission Batch transmission allows you to store multiple documents in an electronic basket throughout the day and then fax that entire basket to one destination To do this just tell the machine when and where the transmission should go When that date and time arrives your machine will transmit each document in the batch box to the remote fax machine You can store up to 40 documents each document can include one or more pages into your machine s five electronic batch boxes Registering a batch box Before sending a batch transmission you have to register batch boxes in your machine Press Setting 2 Press Fax Settings Batch Tx Box Enter Edit 3 Select the batch transmission box you want to register Enter Edit select the box number to enter edit 4 Specify the destination using the numeric keys or the address book Then press Enter NOTE Only one destination can be set for each box e Press Location to review or delete a destina
34. Stored phone number failed to dial properly Stopped e Someone pressed Stop at the remote fax in the middle of the Handshake MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 23 g MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Aas Error codes Dialing errors D 0 3 D 0 8 D 0 2 D 0 6 D 0 7 Reception errors R 1 1 R 1 2 R 1 4 R 2 3 R 3 1 R 3 3 R 3 4 R 4 1 R 4 2 R 4 4 R 5 1 R 5 2 R 8 1 R 8 10 R 8 11 The remote unit didn t respond the call couldn t be completed or Stop was pressed while dialing Re try the call If your machine repeats the message call the remote fax unit s operator and verify that unit is oper ating properly The remote unit is busy Try the call again Either the remote unit didn t respond the call somehow didn t go through or Stop was pressed while dialing Try the call again The calling fax machine didn t respond to your fax machine This can happen if someone dials a wrong number or if the remote machine restricts access through use of a passcode The two fax machines were incompatible Your machine sends and receives only ITU T Group 3 fax communication the industry standard since the early 1980s Stop was pressed on the receiving fax machine Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible Call someone at the remote machine s location The sending fax machine detected too many errors from the receiving fax machine The sending fax machine
35. The usual TTI and the fax number you have entered in the Initial settings page 1 16 to 1 22 and the e mail address assigned to your machine will be pre populated in the cover page automatically e For details on assigning an e mail address to your machine see the Network Guide contained in this product e You can assign Cover Page to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 e You can change the default setting for Cover Page See Accessing the default settings on page 12 4 Entering the cover page message Up to 120 characters can be entered for the message When you enter over 60 characters the line will be automatically broken to the next line You can also insert up to 2 additional line breaks 1 line break is counted as 2 characters That means the number of characters you can enter will be up to 116 when you insert 2 line breaks 1 Press Setting 2 Press Fax Settings 3 Press Cover Page Fax Settings select item to edit settings One Touch Forward Batch Tx Other F Code Bos 4 Enter the cover page message Cover Page Enter the cover page information and select Enter Entry Limit NOTE You can check the entered text by pressing ViewText You cannot edit the text in this display To return to the text editing display press Enter Cover Page Enter the cover page information and select Enter Entry Limit 14 120 We appriciate 147 15 la Enter JA 5 A
36. This sets the print method for the received documents OFF See page 3 21 If it is set to H Page Rx and 2 pages of Half Letter is received in succession the two H Page Rx pages will be reduced at the appropriate rate and printed out on one sheet of paper Duplex Rx If it is set to Duplex Rx both sides of each sheet of paper will be used for printouts A duplex printing unit is required for duplex reception Quick Memory If this is set to ON fax transmission for multiple documents will begin in the page order ON Tx when it has been scanned and stored OFF ECM Mode Any part of a fax that was not send correctly due to the line error will automatically be ON resent The destination must have the same function for it to work on evieote Domes OO Dial PreFix The connection number as Dial PreFix No can be registered to allow easy access to other See page 3 44 phone networks Receive Time If this is set to ON the received date year month day and time can be printed with OFF Stamp the word Received at the header of the received document ON Received Time your machine prints Received MAY 5 2005 02 16pm Sender name Fax Sender fax number MAY 5 2005 02 15pm P 01 01 THE SLEREXE COMPANY LIMITED SAPORS LANE BOOLE DORSET BH25 8ER TELEPHONE BOOLE 94513 51617 TELEX 123456 Sender information sent from the remote fax NOTE If the receiving reduction rate is fixed to
37. _ SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O Q Press Enter to complete the entry NOTE Individual operations cannot be changed once registered You will need to return to the beginning and perform the entire entry again e To print a list of macro keys press Setting List Settings List Macro List then Yes SPECIAL FEATURES 10 9 Deleting a Macro key In any standby mode press Others Macro Program Enter 2 Press Delete Macro Program select desired option eee hey Speed Run EnterEd i ti EREE Edit Title 3 Select the macro key you want to delete Delete select the macro number vou want to delete TiSort Copy Reduce 812 4 Press Yes to delete e If you want to cancel press No Delete Select the macro number you want to delete 1 Sort Copy Reduce 812 Would you like to delete 5 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 10 10 SPECIAL FEATURES Changing the Macro key speed You can adjust the Macro key speed The default setting is Normal In any standby mode press Other Macro Program Enter If nothing is registered in Macro No you cannot change this setting 2 Press Key Speed Macro Program select desired option pened k Normal Edit Title 4 Select the key speed and then press Enter Macro Program Select the key speed and press Enter Key Speed Back Enter 5 Press Reset to return to the standby mode SP
38. a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful inter ference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Canada NOTICE This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Tech nical Specifications NOTICE The Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this terminal equipment is 0 2 The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termina tion on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five Canadian ICES 003 This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada 2 Limited warranty This warranty is made by Muratec America Inc hereafter referred to as Muratec This warranty is valid only on Muratec products purchased and used in the United States of America This warranty applies to the product only while owned and used by the original purchaser Customer If ownership of the pro
39. and try the operation again MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 19 Message on the display Description Solution Paper size error for The cassette tray selected for printing has no suitable paper for printing the job Please XXXX set the paper indicated in the message and print your job or press Cancel to cancel On XXXX Please set paper YYYY To cancel select Cancel Paper supply empty There is no paper that fits the copying document Select on which paper to copy or load paper PC Printing Canceled In PC printing the size of paper in the paper cassette does not match up the paper size you specified by the printer driver Press Stop to cancel a print job Then load the cor rect paper size and try printing the document again Phone connection ter The telephone connected to the machine is hanging up Hang it down minated PIN has not been reg You selected Mode1 in the PIN mask feature and tried to call an address book number istered in which no PIN has been entered or to call using numeric keys without a PIN Enter a PIN Please enter a value The value you entered exceeds the Zoom range Enter a value within the range between 25 100 Please enter a value The value you entered exceeds the Zoom range Enter a value within the between 25 400 range Please enter text You cannot view the text when there is no text entered Enter the text in advance cannot view You cannot view the text when there
40. continue E subject For details on each setting refer to the following table 3 When you are finished press Reset to return to the standby mode MACHINE SETTINGS 12 9 MACHINE SETTINGS R N O When you press I Fax The underlined settings are the factory defaults File Format Select the default file format for scanning TIFF S TIFF F PDF Batch Scan When you set it to OFF you can divide the scanned documents into page unit ON OFF to send it as a separate e mail respectively See page 4 11 O When you press e mail The underlined settings are the factory defaults File Format Select the default file format for scanning You can set the different file format e Monochrome for monochrome documents and color documents respectively TIFF PDF e Color JPEG PDF See page 5 60 Batch Scan When you set it to OFF you can divide the scanned documents into page unit ON OFF to send it as a separate e mail respectively See page 5 59 O When you press Subject The underlined settings are the factory defaults Subject When you set it to ON you can select the subject and the message attached ON OFF to e mail The selected subject and message will be attached to all e mail to be See page 4 7 5 24 sent if you have not entered them for an e mail transmission The e mail template can be registered using the web browser Refer to E mail settings on the Network Guide 12 10 MACHINE SETTI
41. current time and select Enter Time Setting Back ffEnter a005 05 05 02 15 La gt Year Month Day Hour Minutej 3 Press Enter to save the setting GETTING STARTED 1 17 GETTING STARTED Daylight savings Select whether to activate the daylight savings feature Press Set Daylight Saving Select ON to activate daylight savings and OFF to deactivate it User Install Select ON OFF and press Enter Set Daylight Saving Eac Enter 3 Press Enter to save the setting Broadcasting Set the broadcast transmission option If you select ON you need to select a destination s and press Start in order to transmit faxes If you select OFF you can transmit faxes by simply touching the destination key Press Broadcast 2 Select ON or OFF User Install Select ON OFF and press Enter Broadcast Back Enter Selecting On will permanently change the transmission setting to Broadcast Meaning users must press Start after selecting a recipientis If you select ON you can select two or more destinations from the address book at a transmission If you select OFF the transmission will immediately start when you press a destination from the address book 3 Press Enter to save the setting 1 18 GETTING STARTED Phone dialing type Set the dialing type needed for the fax machine either Tone or Pulse Press Comm Line 2 Select
42. different file format e Monochrome for monochrome documents and color documents respectively TIFF PDF e Color JPEG PDF MACHINE SETTINGS 12 7 Accessing other scan settings Press Setting Scanner Settings 2 Set or change the selected items scanner Settings select item to edit Default Folder FTF For details on each setting refer to the following table 3 When you are finished press Reset to return to the standby mode The underlined settings are the factory defaults File Name You can register a file name in advance for scanned file If you register a file For details of registering name you can choose it instead of entering a file name when scanning a docu a file name see page 5 8 ment Folder Shortcut You can create a shortcut of Windows shared folder on your machine You can For details of registering also edit or delete the created shortcuts a folder shortcut see page 5 35 FTP Shortcut You can create a shortcut of FTP server on your machine You can also edit or For details of registering delete the created shortcuts FTP shortcut see page 5 49 12 8 MACHINE SETTINGS Mail settings You can customize the mail settings to match your needs Accessing the mail settings Press Setting Mail Settings 2 Press I Fax or e mail for the individual settings of internet fax and e mail Set or change the selected items Mail Settings Select item to edit Press Enter to
43. e To have the next document scanned press Next Doc while the document is being scanned e The ADF s default setting is set to Complete To scan the next document select Next Doc while the current document is being scanned For the docu ment glass the default setting is Next Doc e Setting to Complete during scanning will begin copying of the scanned docu ments Copy reservation A different document can be set and reserved for copying even while another copy is being printed After the current job has been printed the next job will begin mean ing you won t have any downtime Copy Reserve Ready will be displayed while the job is printing Copy Reserve Ready Q1 Complete ocan Pages 3 PrintPages 3 Copies 17 1 Doc Type i Au tog Norma lig 2 Set the document you want to reserve 3 Adjust the copy settings See pages 7 8 to 7 9 4 Press Start 5 Press Yes to perform copy reservation The document will be scanned and copying will begin after the current job has finished Copy Reserve Ready 0 ocan Pages 3 PrintPages 3 Copies 17 1 Memory qq Doc Type ff Autos Contrast i lt 7 NOTE The copy queue can be checked See page 7 28 COPYING 7 7 COPYING BA Basic copy settings Document type 300 dpi or 600 dpi can be selected for Text and Photo Refer to the table below and select the appropriate resolution The default setting is Auto Document type Auto Docu
44. either the fax number or e mail address e Up to 50 characters can be entered e For details on character entry see page 1 10 3 Press Enter If you want to add this destination to a call group e Call groups must be registered in advance For details on registering call groups see page 2 14 e Up to 32 groups can be registered 1 Press Group 2 Select the applicable group s 3 Press Enter USING THE ADDRESS Book 10 Press Enter to save the setting 006 Taro Tokyo Office select the address book item to enter edit Enter Group S_Group 01 5_Group 0b 1 The registration destinations will be displayed 12 To register another destination repeat the procedure from step 4 Press Reset to exit the operation and return to the standby mode NOTE To print a list of address book entries press Setting List Address Book then Yes Alternative 1 Registering or editing directly into the address book Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Add Edit Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Sep 26 2005 02 156m m O0isSanchew York Office Jf TA OFFI History F 3 Following the operation from step 4 in Registering or editing a destination USING THE ADDRESS BooK 2 1 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK Alternative 2 Registering or editing the fax number using the numeric keys Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Use the numeric keys to enter the destination s fax
45. execute the job while printing Wait until the printing is finished and re try the operation Paper has jammed Follow the guidance on the display and remove the paper Ratio is set to 100 The zoom ratio is set to 100 To change the zoom ratio set it again Real time transmissions You tried to send a fax using real time transmission or set memory transmission to cannot be archived OFF when the archive function is set up To archive the document use memory trans mission Real time TX in prog The machine cannot print out the job until the current communication finishes Please ress Cannot print wait Replace the drum The drum cartridge has run out Replace with a new drum cartridge Reset the document Remove the document from the ADF and set them again 14 20 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Message on the display Description Solution Rx document stored To set the security reception to OFF first print out the stored security receipted docu ment Scanner Adjusting Your machine s scanner is preparing Please wait until the machine is ready The machine cannot execute the job until the current job finishes Please wait Select Paper Size The selected paper is not suitable for the document Select other paper Select paper source There is no paper that fits the copying document Select on which paper to copy or load paper Select the bypass paper The paper in the bypass tray cannot print out a received fax To
46. faxing the e Reset time selected settings are reset returned to their original values You can set the 1 to 10 minutes reset time 3 minutes MACHINE SETTINGS 12 11 1 MACHINE SETTINGS NO Sound Settings Energy Save Mode See page 1 23 Auto Print Journal Journal Line Up Protect Passcode You can set the various sounds Buzzer and Key Touch Volume You can adjust the volume of the various sounds emitted by the machine Key Touch Tone You can change the tone emitted when pressing the buttons Different tones can be set for fax copy and scanner Fax Ringer You can set the ringer for fax reception even if the optional handset is not used Complete beep You can confirm when each operation copy fax e mail scan etc is completed by sound e Copy Complete When copying has finished e Transmission Complete When a fax an internet fax a scan to e mail a scan to folder a scan to FTP have been sent When a fax has been received When printing a received document has finished e Rx Complete e Rx Print Complete NOTE Press Test to hear the selected sounds Paper Jam Alarm Sound an alarm tone when a paper jam occurs You can set the transition time to the energy save mode and whether to enable the transition time you set NOTE You can put the machine into energy save mode by pressing Energy Save regardless of this settings Energy Save Mode When you set it to OFF Energy Save Time
47. for the next transmission Use this to make a delayed transmission Stores a document for batch transmission Specify the scanning size for documents Use this for polling reception Use this for F code polling Use this to make an F code transmission Enable or disable overseas transmission Enable or disable memory transmission Use this to enter the N symbol p 13 8 FAXING 3 23 Broadcasting The fastest way to fax one document to many destinations is to broadcast it In an ordinary broadcast you can send faxes and e mails as you normally would except you just add more fax numbers and e mail addresses You can enter up to 330 numbers e Address book numbers Up to 300 destinations e Manually dialed numbers Up to 30 destinations You can broadcast using any function that requires a fax number and e mail address to be registered To perform a broadcast transmission Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2 4 Press Broadcast Fay Ready Fax Ready Mode sep 2b Memory 100 Resolution Normal y Limes 3 24 FAXING 5 Specify the destination Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Select Location to confirm delete recipient To 003 Larl Paris Office Resolution P00 San New York Office SHE EQ002 Mike London Office Redial i EMAI History e Use the numeric keys to dial the number
48. group or numeric order Add Edit Adds or edits the destination GETTING STARTED 1 5 GETTING STARTED Scan standby mode scan to e mail Gen 26 200 emory 100g Resolution hdd Edit RI Ada Edi J HN01 Sam New York Office Narna GOO Mike London Office A Time Display and Memory Doc Type Autoe Carl Paris Office at Color Z Soft Keys 004 Beth Chicago Office Ea ee ing Office Ioan Address Book Name Function Message Area Displays the machine s current status operation instructions error messages and other information Time Display Displays the current date time and amount of scan memory and Memory available Address Book Displays the registered destinations Soft Keys Displays five functions frequently used You can assign other functions to soft key according your needs See Soft key on page 10 2 Others Press this to display the various scan functions Search Press this to search the destination from your Address Book or your LDAP server Index Displays the destinations in alphabetical or group or numeric order Add Edit Adds or edits the destination 1 6 GETTING STARTED Sean standby mode scan to folder fh 2005 OF Memory 1002 Browse Add Edit S101 12345678901 23456789012 BIOd Nep ser c mexico_g Time Display and Memory Resolution 00dpi Normal Auto ORF Shortcut List N
49. has been cleared CAUTION When you open the side cover to remove the paper DO NOT touch the fuser roller The fuser unit is very hot IMPORTANT Do not touch the drum cartridge surface Scratches or smudges will result in poor print quality Removing jammed paper Pull the release lever to open the side cover If the optional second cassette has been attached open the 2nd side cover as well 2 Carefully remove the jammed paper in the direction shown NOTE Avoid getting loose toner on your hands and clothes when removing the jammed paper Q Jam in the feed area MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 13 g MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Aas LJ Jam in the fuser area iff oa ane 0 Jam in the paper exit area O If the jammed paper was partially fed and you cannot remove it easily 3 Open the paper cassette Pull it out completely lifting the front part of the cas sette up to release the cassette from the machine ZZ ZINN lt x gt lt Q eZ Z ZN NNA A lt Wo YF Y KR SES AK S 4 Carefully remove the jammed paper 2 S G 14 14 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Close the side cover and insert the paper cassette Lower the rear part of the cassette to align with the the slot of the machine then insert it MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 15 i MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING AS Displayed error messages
50. how to install the driver and how to use the PC Fax function CD Located on the driver CD Getting Started Using the Address Book Faxing Internet Fax functions Scanning Reviewing or canceling commands Copying PC Fax functions PC Printing Special features Restricting use of the machine Machine Settings Report amp Lists Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Appendix amp Index DPlirPl eP RP e Re J UI W Hi em wl ryo re o Contents Regulatory information cccccccsscsccccessssscccccessssceecesesssseececessseeecceeessseesecesessaeeeeeecstaeeeees I 1 United States of AN OTIC gs eitse dened ass casnectet crane ceact tena ETEEN R Eas I 1 C T EE E E EE E E EEEE EEEE 2 Limited Warranty ccsccuissecpcouscctyatdatae tetoacntnauscoiadinoseavoudnoasteadetonditaeseotaboastadertaiausedoutoentwicewsanrusins 1 3 METS CEL LO MG PATE E AEE E E E EE A AA A T AE 1 5 Installation precautions ss sccetrasetuanecncdesnaactustaonesntosdundnioaererniacsasttuntstanienostunoedaoenetanccoeimusten 1 5 Fowerreqguiremen GS rece cece ccacuaposdesiesatncnseudcaiacosdecqeesuatendosesainas E 1 6 Space requirements oc rsatacconsecreaaocnoeartisionnamsasanencatunedauesataaraeisseosshaacatennsonedecostdeumeaieenaines 7 General precatione sareren en E Oe en ar 7 Storing and handling the toner and drum Cartridges cccccccsssccsccesessseeeceessseeeees 1 8 Legal restrictions on Copying ogee ee ee 1 9 Caution LiD
51. is incompatible or had a document feeder prob lem during transmission Poor phone line conditions may have prevented your fax machine from properly printing some or all of the pages it received The machine received too much data overloading the memory Either the line disconnected before transmission or the transmitting fax machine needs maintenance The machine has reached its memory capacity ECM reception failed perhaps due to line noise A compatibility error occurred Line noise or other problems prevented line probing The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal Transmission errors T 1 1 T 1 4 T 2 1 T 2 2 T 2 3 The remote fax machine didn t respond to your machine Call someone at the remote machine s location Stop was pressed during transmission Either the phone line disconnected during transmission or fax communi cation became impossible due to bad phone line conditions Try the call again The two fax machines were incompatible Your machine sends and receives only ITU T Group 3 fax communication the industry standard since the early 1980s Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible Condi tions can change rapidly so try the call again later 14 24 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING T 3 1 T 4 1 T 4 2 T 4 4 T 5 1 T 5 2 T 5 3 T 8 1 T 8 10 T 8 11 The page counter in your fax machine detected a document feeder error during transmis
52. memory transmission 0006 3 8 Manual transmission non memory transmission 3 9 Changing Document Scan in Mid Scan Mixed Transmission 3 10 POC TAM TN eee sa autesd ede tle uitet anon cose easiadiaecietaecauseaesssevseeaeanaese 3 13 Automati fax 6 Hk UN 129 eee eee eee eee one Ove en one CO 3 13 IVE POCA I suited teecedoosnasece aistatsavel E E 3 13 PROC 1 VA a liaere a A 3 15 Selecting the reception mode ssesessssssserrssrrerrsssrrerrsereresserreressens 3 15 Manual reception MOd one Po 3 15 Automatic reception Mmode esseseesesssserrsssserersssreressererssssreeresssrees 3 16 Answering calls manually sseeeeseeeeeesessreresesrrrssssrerrssererssserreresssres 3 17 If paper runs out during fax reception eeeeccserrcrrrerrrrreerrerrssen 3 17 Settings for lax reception essensa kird irai irn i iir EN E na EE narini 3 20 Setting the number of rings accreccoscaaccoassasecncasessesctecseeussninsenenstncs 3 20 PPT MSC O ce a E E EE E E 3 20 Advanced fax WTA HONG i espssespniinesiiien e i e i 3 23 Bodeo OU a e E A E EA 3 24 Fax amp AOD Yaron cosetsdesostestendveatsacnuseaosnandeonnsorseasiesspnessancrsaacsscconiaieves 3 28 Sending faxes with TTI information attached ccccecceeees 3 30 Cover eo est ascesneedeeoriandoendseasesaas aicasna de ostavsancaresuvasenoacsonavesceenteveess 3 32 Delayed transmission vais eocreasiezeasaroensceasnossesacttebassanvanrnnsestoeaunedee 3 34 Batch t ansmissiOn scene tecnrnwasc
53. niare E EE E A A E E a 11 2 Passcode protection eeeseeesssssssseressssssrrrressssrreerressssereresssesereeeeesss 11 2 Security reception eeessessessssssseressserresssrreresrrereesserereesereresssrreeessees 11 3 PINa e N EAE E OEE eee eee 11 7 Department management sssssseseeseesssssssssssereeeresssssssssssreeeeeeessssssss 11 13 Registering the copy charge Cost management 11 13 Registering department COdES ccccccccesssssceesssseecessssseeeeeens 11 14 Deleting department COdES ccccssssscccccessessssceeeceesesssseeeeees 11 16 Turning department management ON ccccccsessesscesesscssesseeseees 11 17 Using department codes ccccccccccssssssecesssseeeceessseeeceesssseeess 11 17 Printing a list of department management settings 11 19 Resetting the department COUNTEL cccccsesssscccceeeessssseeeeees 11 20 Turning department management protection On Off 11 21 Copy DEOLCC HON dsccscatienontncaperdaxsecacsasersssdesvontmetsstiactisenaticomalacnadaaies 11 22 Security features Your machine has a number of security features to keep your fax documents pri vate avoid unwanted outside communication and even protect against unauthor ized machine usage These security features include 1 Security reception 2 PIN masking 3 Block junk fax and 4 Department codes Passcode protection Your machine has a passcode protection system that secure
54. number 3 Press Register Fay Ready Fax Ready Mode Enter the recipient s fax number and select Enter Fax Number 123456 f3_ 4 Select the address book number you want to register using A or Y then select Yes Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Enter the recipient s fax number and select Input range 001 300 dg Would you like to register z o g Unregistered number is displayed first If you select an address book number that has already been registered the fax number will be overwritten with the new number 5 Follow steps 5 to 12 on pages 2 5 to 2 7 2 8 USING THE ADDRESS Book Alternative 3 Registering an e mail address using the QWERTY keypad Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press e mail tab 3 Press Mail Address Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode 6 2005 02 15pm Memory 100 Resolutianilsearch Normally Contrast E001 Sam New York Office Normali 002 Mike London Office OFF O03 Carl Paris Office Mail W address i O04 Beth Chicago Office FEM E005 Chang Beijing Office History f When e mail tab is selected 4 Use the QWERTY keypad to enter the destination s e mail address 5 Press Register Mail Address Enter the recipient s e mail address and select Enter Entry Limit 14 450 e mail jadams onk com 6 Select the address book number you want to register using A V or the numeric keys then select Yes Enter the recipient s e ma
55. pages Based on 4 document coverage and letter sized two page interval printing NOTE Specifications are subject to change without notice AI 4 APPENDIX amp INDEX Index A Activity journal cccecceeece ees 13 5 Address book sccccseseceeeeeeeees 2 2 deleting cceeece eee 2 10 2 11 how to dial siescivcsesezseedcesoseonssces 2 12 registering editing 2 4 2 7 2 8 2 9 Attachment 27 45 c5 20 dshsncsesabsegesesstees 5 64 Auto Reset Time 0000 12 11 B Batch scanning 06 4 11 5 59 Batch transmission 0068 3 35 Block junk TAX ccecce 3 46 Broadcasting c00eceees 3 24 5 63 C Call erop s csasseonsisassussaecswaresseeas 2 14 deleting ou ee ceecceecceseeeeeeees 2 15 how to dial spcestacececs saucers 2 16 registering editing 06 2 14 Card ODY scssssabssivasenssatcsewnesssecas 7 25 Character entering dusssneswicsccdiaweiuencestheaveds 1 10 Check mail ocx aicasessanetentoascesenceasoene 4 12 Check message ccccceeceeeeees 14 23 Cleaning ADF rollers cecce 14 3 drum charge wire ecce 14 3 print head seeen 14 3 scanning area esesseseesersesseree 14 2 CODD oroe S 5 56 Combine COPY cscccescceescensceees 7 14 Control panel scsosssaseecesossnteadsereedceeas 1 3 Copy print queue 3 18 7 28 Copy protection ccceceeeeees 11 22 Copy reservation cesccessceeecees 7 7 CODY sett
56. pages copied Counts the pages up to 999999 pages If the copy count exceeds the maximum limit it will stop counting e Total copy charge Counts the copy charge up to 99 99 If the copy charge exceeds the maximum charge it will stop counting If you want to reset the counter see Resetting the department counter on the next page To print the list Press Setting List Settings List Department List then Yes The depart ment list will be printed NOTE If the department management feature has been protected See page 11 21 you cannot print the department list You will have to deactivate the password protection feature in order to print RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 19 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E Resetting the department counter To delete the current counts for department management Press Setting Management Next Depart Management 2 Press Counter Reset Depart Management select item to edit Enter EdIt Protect 3 Press Yes to reset the counter for each department Press No to return to step 2 Depart Management select item to edit Counter Reset ls it OK to reset the counter 4 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 11 20 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE Turning department management protection On Off This feature protects the department management settings from unauthorized access After you set it you will have to enter the pass
57. pages stored during this these pages operation The display shows how many pages are stored Yes No You need to enter a name for the registration No command stored You pressed Fax Cancel Job Confirm to review upcoming commands but your machine has no command stored No department codes To set the department management on first register the department codes have been registered No document stored You tried to print a document from memory but your machine has no documents in storage No Drum Cartridge The drum cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in your machine Please properly install the drum cartridge No Network Connection The machine is not connected to the network Check the network cable or the settings For more information refer to the Network Guide No paper type set on The cassette tray selected for printing is empty Please set the paper indicated in the the PC message and print your job or press Cancel to cancel On XXXX Please set paper Letter Plain To cancel select Cancel No paper type set on The paper selected for printing is not set to the machine Please set the paper indicated the PC in the message and print your job or press Cancel to cancel Please set paper XXXX To cancel select Cancel No polling document You tried to print out or delete a polling document when there is no polling document in memory No protect passcode To protect the Departme
58. preset ratio use or the numeric keys to set the magnifica tion Comb ine Use the arrows or numeric keypad to select the zoom ratio and press Enter 2 S COPYING BA 1543 129 1213 e Reduce e The magnification can be set from 25 to 100 for the ADF from 25 to 400 for the document glass 3 Press Enter 8 Press Enter twice to return to the standby mode Q Set the document and press Start NOTE Press Reset to cancel the combine copy settings CopyING 7 15 Duplex copy You can use this function to perform e One sided copying of a duplex document 2 1 See page 7 19 Binding l l Result image of ne Document orientation position duplexed copy 1 The front and backside of the document must be in the same direction 7 16 COPYING Binding l Result image of ve Document orientation position duplexed copy e When you place When you place the front side the backside 2 gt 2 sided Top gt 2 sided R amp L 1 The front and backside of the document must be in the same direction e When you place When you place the front side the backside AN 2 The front side and the backside are set in different directions NOTE Enlargement copy is only available when you perform the duplex copy 1 2 of one sided documents using the document glass e This machine does not have an image rotation function CoPYING 7 17 COPYING B How to bind copied documents Th
59. registered Shortcut is all right SCANNING 5 53 SCANNING oO Editing an FTP shortcut Press Setting 2 Press Scanner Settings FTP Shortcut Add Edit FIP Shortcut Select item to edit Add Edit 3 Select the shortcut you want to edit Add Edit Select a shortcut to enter edit Prev tof 4b Next ee01 FTP Shortcut 1 egvO6 FTP Shortcut 6 4 Edit the desired item 01 FTP Shortcut 1 Select a number to enter edit Enter Shortcut Name FTP Shortcut 1 Link nA FTPI DEMO UserName MUR ATEL 5 After editing press Enter 6 To return to the standby mode press Reset 5 54 SCANNING Deleting an FTP shortcut Press Setting 2 Press Scanner Settings FTP Shortcut then Delete FIP Shortcut Select item to edit Add Edit Delete 3 Select the shortcut you want to delete Delete Select the FIP shortcut to delete Select Enter to continue rev tof a gt Next me01 FIP Shortcut 1 4 Press Yes to delete Delete Select the FIP shortcut to delete Select Enter to continue geO1 FTP Shortcut 1 Would you like to delete 5 To return to the standby mode press Reset SCANNING 5 55 SCANNING oO Advanced functions Color Use this key to toggle the monochrome and color scan modes Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press Color Scan Ready Memory 100 Address J Crer The color sc
60. text message Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail 4 Press Others 5 Press e mail Subject Scan Functions select item to edit Program 1002 Auto OFF ON DuplexScan Batch ScanFileFormat iddress ES Eee hail NOTE You can assign e mail Subject to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 6 Press Subject e mai lSubject Add a subject line and message or select a template then press Enter Subject E mail Message Mail Text MThis is an E mail message WIF le Temiar 5 24 SCANNING 7 Enter the subject The subject can contain up to 80 characters subject Enter the subject line and select Enter Entry Limit 07 80 Cancel 8 Press Enter Q Press Mail Text Add a subject line and message or select a template then press Enter Subject E mail Message Mai Text This is an E mail nessage MIP le 10 Enter the text message NOTE The mail text can contain up to 1024 characters Return is counted as two characters and can be used twice Mail Text Enter the mail text and select Enter Entry Limit 46 1024 Mail Text se find the attuched document Ml SCANNING 5 25 SCANNING a To view the entire text message press View Text Use the arrows to view all the text Press Enter to close to return to the QWERTY keypad Mail Text Enter the mail text and select Enter Entry Limit 146 1024 Please fin
61. the deletion Delete Enter 0 Code O1 New York Office Would you like to delete 5 To delete another F code box repeat from step 2 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 10 30 SPECIAL FEATURES Storing a document in a bulletin box Each bulletin box can hold up to 30 documents Set the document See page 1 25 2 Press Setting Store Doc Settings Store Store Doc Settings Select item to edit Press Enter to continue 3 Press Bulletin Box Doc store Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Polling Bulletin Doc Box Doc 4 Select the F code box that you want to store the document in Bulletin Box Doc select a bulletin box Press Enter to continue O3 London Office SPECIAL FEATURES 10 31 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O 5 Use the numeric keys to enter the I D code 4 digits if it has been set Proceed to step 6 if an I D code has not been set Bulletin Box Doc Enter D Code D Code L Lt J LS Lies 6 Select the document storage method e Over Write Overwrites documents in the box e Add Adds documents to the box Bulletin Box Doc select document storage method Over write Replace a box document Adc Add a box document 7 Press Yes Bulletin Box Doc select document storage method Over Write Store document 10 32 SPECIAL FEATURES Printing stored documents You can print out documents in the security rec
62. the destination s using the address book _or e Specify the address book number NOTE You cannot use the numeric keys to manually enter a destination Group mem bers must be pre registered into the address book before they can be added to a group Fax numbers and e mail addresses can be registered into the same call group 3 Press Enter 5 A group information will be displayed 6 To register additional call groups press Enter then repeat the procedure from step 2 Press Reset to exit the operation and return to the standby mode NOTE e To print a list of call groups press Setting List Group Then press Yes e Destinations can be added to a group during the initial registration process See page 2 4 Deleting a call group Press Setting Group 2 Press the call group you want to delete 3 Press Delete Yes If you want to exit without deleting press No 4 To delete another call group repeat the procedure from step 2 Otherwise press Reset to exit and return to the standby mode USING THE ADDRESS Book 2 15 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK N How to dial using a call group Sending a fax or e mail using a call group Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the document resolution and contrast if necessary 4 Press Others Group Tx NOTE You can assign Group Tx to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 5 1 Press the group s
63. the dialing type User Install select the communication line type and press Enter a 3 Press Enter to save the setting Fax reception mode Select the reception mode that best matches the machine usage Press Reception Mode Select the reception mode For description of the reception modes see Select ing the reception mode on page 3 15 User Install Select the reception mode and press Enter Reception Mode Back Enter Fax Tel Fax Faxr Tel EPHE Fead Model Ready Mode Ready Model Ready Mode 3 Press Enter to save the setting GETTING STARTED 1 19 GETTING STARTED Dial tone detection Select if you set the dial tone detection Select OFF normally Press DialTone Detect 2 Select ON to detect the dial tone and OFF if the detection is not required User Install Select ON OFF and press Enter DialTone Detect Back J Enter If you select ON you cannot transmit the faxes through the line that does not aquire the dial tone 3 Press Enter to save the setting TTI your name Three types of TTI Transmit Terminal Indentifier can be set Press TTI Enter Edit 2 Press TTI 1 3 Enter the TTI TT 1 Enter the TTI and select Enter Entry Limit 4 Press Enter after the entry to save it For description of character entry see Entering characters on page 1 10 5 In the same way you can enter the TTI 2 and TTI 3 1 20
64. the mail reception history The reception history for the last 50 Internet faxes and scan to e mails can be displayed 5 Press Mail report Rx History ireport Tx ieee 6 The mail reception history will be displayed 7 Select the transaction you want to display The transaction result is displayed Mail report Rx Enter 8 Press Yes to print the transaction results Mail report Rx Would vou like to print 01 Carl Paris Office lt carl m muratec c Subject Meeting schedule Date 05 06 01 30pm Result Hote The transaction results will be printed NOTE Regarding the error code in Result column see Error codes on pages 14 24 to 14 25 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS 6 12 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS Chapter Copying Pare 16 0 E ee E ee 7 2 Document and paper handling cc cc ccceessscccceesssseceeesssseeceessaees 7 2 Memory overflow MeSSage cccccccccsssscscccssssessccessssssceessssseeceeesaees 7 2 DaM 616 0 E eee ee ne ee ee ee ee ree eee eee 7 3 DORAT CON E rera er E EE 7 3 Setting the next document ccceeccccceessscsccessssseecesssseesceessaees 7 3 Copying using both document glass and ADF 7 5 Copy reserv ALO esc aeh ceca sce scan pce aseaebh NSARE ENN Si 7 7 Basic copy sen aS eee Pn E 7 8 Document type can essarseaqurooaasdoveerataednactsicenstue nintaaieiosudeedoncieseoseaarabast 7 8 OT
65. this cassette when receiving faxes or internet faxes printing a list and copying NOTE Priority of cassette to be used is cassette 1 gt cassette 2 option gt bypass tray e When you set Separate Reception Page to ON you cannot select Not Use or Copy for the cassette specified in Separate Reception Page e 2nd cassette is displayed when installed in the machine Separate Partition each received document by inserting a separator page See Separator page on Reception Page page 3 57 NOTE The settings for the various functions set under Paper Settings are printed out in the System Settings List See page 13 2 12 14 MACHINE SETTINGS Chapter Ji 3 Report amp Lists Lists and POU IVAN FON iS crunicore i S 13 2 Activity Jornal seiri reri rene nanne NEEE EEEE 13 5 Setting the activity journal eeseeseresssssrrrserrrrrsssrrrrrsererrsssrreressens 13 5 Printing the activity journal manually 13 6 Setting the order on the activity journal ecer 13 7 Transmission confirmation report cccceccccceesssseccceessseccesssseeeceens 13 8 Setting the transmission confirmation report 13 8 Stored document VISE ssscactscaahecsencsecsecsen sanseontostoerieausenssioeteamerteeaseiss 13 9 Erased document notification ccccsccccccssseccccaccccccccccececeeecccensess 13 10 Lists and journal reports The following table outlines the lists and journal reports that your machine can print out
66. this code e To release the I D code first enter the current registered I D code and then enter 0000 2 Enter the I D code 4 digits using the numeric keys then press Enter e If you enter an incorrect character press Clear to delete it and enter the correct character Bulletin Box Enter D Code password LD Code 0 Back Enter pakk O C e Q To register another F code box press Enter then repeat from step 2 of Regis tering or editing an F code box on page 10 22 Press Reset to return to the standby mode SPECIAL FEATURES 10 29 SPECIAL FEATURES G O Printing a list of F code boxes To print a list of your F code boxes press Setting List Other Lists F Code Box then Yes Printing a list of documents stored in F code boxes To print a list of documents stored in F code boxes press Setting List Other Lists F Code Doc then Yes Deleting an empty F code box An F code box must be empty in order to delete it If you select the F code box which is not empty the machine will beep If this happens print the documents in the box prior to deleting it To delete an empty F code box Press Setting Fax Settings F Code Box Delete 2 Select the F code box you want to delete 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the I D code 4 digits if it has been set If an I D code has not been set proceed to step 4 4 Press Yes to delete e Press No to cancel
67. this issue change the currently using code page to code page 850 on your Windows IMPORTANT To change the code page you will modify Windows registry Before you modify the registry make sure to back it up and make sure that you understand how to restore the registry if a problem occurs For information about how to back up restore and edit the registry refer to the article number 256986 in the Microsoft Knowledge Base http support microsoft com kb 256986 en us WARNING If you use Registry Editor incorrectly you may cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system We cannot guarantee that you can solve problems that result from using Registry Editor incorrectly Use Registry Edi tor at your own risk To change the code page on your Windows On your computer click Start click Run type regedit and then click OK 2 Locate and double click the following registry key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Control Nls Codepage OKMCP 3 In Value data type 850 and click OK MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 27 g MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Aas Copying errors Suggested solutions Cannot make a copy e Make sure that the machine is in copy mode If not change to the copy mode by pressing COPY e Make sure that the document is loaded correctly If placing the document on the document glass the side to be copied should be face down If placing the do
68. touch keys Mode 1 In Mode 1 you must register a PIN to the program one touch key Transmission will not be possible if a PIN number has not been registered If Mode 2 has been set the following procedure is not neccessary Registering or editing an entry using the program one touch keys See page 10 14 if necessary 2 Enter the phone number then press the star to enter the PIN The PIN always follows the fax number For example to dial 98776544 with a PIN of 12345678 enter 98776544 12345678 Prog One Touch Enter the recipient s fax number and select Enter Fax Number 98 f 6544 123456 f3_ Cr ee JC Use the address book and specify the number that contains the PIN number See Registering the address book on page 11 8 NOTE You cannot specify the destination if a PIN has not been registered For details on registering a PIN number in the address book see Registering the address book Mode 1 on page 11 8 3 Press Enter to save the number o If you press Enter without entering the PIN the machine will beep and display The following data is required PIN and then return to step 2 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 4 1 Press Others and register the advanced communications 2 Press Enter twice to save the settings RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 9 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E Dialing when using the PIN mask U If you selec
69. transmission confirmation LePOrt ccccccccceesssscecceeesssseeeceeesseeeccesesaes 13 8 BU St A0eumieni ot risers E N EEE OT E 13 9 Erased document notification sssirisiriirsrirnsirrssisssreisnsniinssnins oniinn n a 13 10 Chapter 14 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting sssssesssssseccccseccccccsoocccecsoococeccooocceccsooccecccococcesosoooccessooceceesoe 14 1 Maintenant E sascansepasnesnsvapasetin en r r EER E aE TE ONA ASE a EA AEUR ENEA 14 2 Ceana I an T T T E names aaeaeests 14 2 Cleaning the scanning area cccccesssssscccceesssseeeccesesceescceesssseececessneeeeeeeeesseeeeceeenaes 14 2 Cleaning the ADF rollers accntaassuacniacerssaacoutercastseautasussutantacsnistdenonssnavsaecutadwatwadstaccendedaoots 14 3 Cleaning the drum charge wire and the print head ccccccccccsssssceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeees 14 3 Replacing the toner cartridge vassesstacsssasscssataniassvontacdaioraniacdovavseoondonaadedeniacwisuncstacdonmeaaenis 14 5 Replacing the drum cartridge cca ssnacecascanedooaesanssinaieconasenet cas suonsnootstantataeldasnssnumedsemanteens 14 7 Troubleshooting ac secosmrsciascieasintlsdioueca suicepindun nee tmondie twats ade unenencapuaen ENKEN ANATAKA Er NEEL EaI ENN 14 9 Document Jamg ccascssncezcvistyrtutsieaatceed sen crtedaxaenosetnorta adeveteetnenewetieaiausdetnaehecwstvidetareemtdiuuns 14 9 TCL JAIN a EEA A EES EEEE 14 13 Displayed error messages ccccccccceessssseecccessssceeccesesceeeceesessseeeccessssse
70. up to 16 characters Sub address This is the ITU T subaddress needed to perform an F code fax transac tion A subaddress and password can contain up to 20 characters and may consist of numbers or The subaddress and password if set sent from remote fax machine must match with your F code box s subaddress and password for F code communication to be possible Password This is the password for ITU T subaddressing Assigning a password is optional but using a password will make your F code communication more secure Box feature You can set up an F code box as a bulletin box or a security reception box e Bulletin box Holds scanned or received documents in memory and waits for a polling request from another F code compatible fax machine e Security box Documents received in the security box are held for a predetermined by user time period and are not printed automati cally You will need to enter an I D code to print them I D code This 4 digit I D code protects the F code box settings from unauthor ized access Assigning an I D code is optional for the bulletin box but required for the security box SPECIAL FEATURES 10 21 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O Registering or editing an F code box NOTE If you want to change an existing F code box you first must delete the old box before creating a new one Press Setting Fax Settings F Code Box Enter Edit 2 Select the F code box you want to registe
71. use the bypass tray that cannot be used for Paper as a separator page change the paper source in the bypass tray Rx Server Initializing The machine s network is now preparing Please wait until it is ready Server issue Call for An internal network error has occurred Contact your Muratec dealer service error code Set document in the You tried to make a 2 gt 2side or 2 gt 1side copy using the document glass Those ADF copy are only available from the ADF Set individual forward The Fax Forward is not set up To use this function set up the forwarding condition in ing numbers first advance Set paper XXXX paper XXXX Set paper XXXX There is no paper in the bypass tray Load the paper indicated on the display is no paper in the There is no paper in the bypass tray Load the paper indicated on the display tray Load the paper indicated on the display Set the individual for The Fax Forward is not set up To use this function set up the forwarding condition in warding numbers first advance Set the Read Write You tired to create a Read Only protect code prior to Read Write code Create a Code first Read Write code first Setting must be When the machine is on the Network you cannot set Fax Forwarding from the machine changed from the side Use the browser for the setting browser Supply Separator Paper The paper for separator reception has run out Load paper in the designate cassette
72. wish to register Contact information select eet add this contact Mame abcdef e mail abcdef muratec com Tel 1234567890 Fax 1254587699 Div 3 Press Register 4 Select an address book entry number using A Y or the numeric keys You cannot select a number that has already been registered Contact information tae uae 2 add this contact to the address book Input range 001 300 I dinQ15 Would you like to register 5 Press Yes 6 Enter the Name Fax No or Group information as needed The Name field must be registered For more information how to enter them see Regitering or editing an address book number from page 2 4 015 Select the address book item to enter edit Enter abcdet Fax No 21234667099 e mai l abcdef muratec com 7 Press Enter 8 To return to the standby mode press Reset 5 20 SCANNING Sending a document using the mail history The last 20 manually entered e mail locations you sent will be stored in the mail history You can send documents to these locations by simply selecting them from this listing NOTE E mail addresses registered in the address book will not appear in the mail his tory Only the last 20 addresses entered manually will be displayed in the order in which they were sent most recent location listed first The same location will not appear multiple times on this list the last time in which it was used Press S
73. you want to send to Fax Functions Select a groups to send to and press S Group 01 S Group 03 5 Group O85 S Group 0 S Group O09 2 Press Enter twice e If you want to edit the selected destination press Location and edit it 6 Press Start e If you want to cancel the a transmission that is in progress use the Review Commands feature See Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands 2 16 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK Alternative Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Index Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 1003 Resolution ear chl I Add Edit Normal Search Contrast 4 N001 Sam New York Office Page Horma l HOO S8an New York Office Broadcast i 2 OFF Is E002 Mike London Office Red ial 7 E002 Mike London Office ail ff ganoa tarl Paris Office History i 4 Press Group Index select the Address Book search category USING THE ADDRESS BOOK o e 5 Select the call group for group transmission select the group you want to send to Non Group Members Cancel o Group Oif S Group DA Group 03 5 Group OS Group Ub S Group F USING THE ADDRESS Book 2 17 NOTE When you press Non Group Members destinations not included in a call group will be displayed Group gt Non Group Select a contact s and press Enter Lance mi4 Beth W Chicago Office E008 Beth WChicago Office BHO09 Chang
74. 100 and the reduction margin setting is small the received document could be divided into 2 sheets by attaching the Receive Time Stamp 12 6 MACHINE SETTINGS Scanner settings You can customize the scanner functions to match your needs Accessing the default scan settings Press Setting Scanner Settings 2 Press Default Settings Scanner Settings select item to edit Default Folder FTF 3 Set or change the selected items Default Settings select item to edit 1 For details on each setting refer to the following table 4 When you are finished press Reset to return to the standby mode The underlined settings are factory defaults Doc Type This sets the default setting for the resolution of the document to be scanned Text Auto Photo Matching the settings to the frequently scanned documents can shorten the time required to adjust settings Contrast This sets the default setting for the contrast of the document to be scanned Lightest Lighter Normal Matching the settings to the frequently scanned documents can shorten the time Darker Darkest MACHINE SETTINGS required to adjust settings Resolution This sets the resolution when scanning the document You can set the different Monochrome settings for monochrome documents and color documents 200dpi 300dpi 600dpi e Color 100dpi 200dpi 300dpi 600dpi File Format Select the default file format for scanning You can set the
75. 123456 189_ CEED 5 Use the numeric keys to enter the password and then press Enter e Up to 20 digits consisting of numerals and or can be used for passwords e If a password is not required press Enter without entering anything and proceed to step 6 F Code Tx Password K11221172 _ CEES 6 Press Enter to return to the standby mode 7 Specify the destination and begin the fax transmission The numeric keys address book and group dialing can be used SPECIAL FEATURES 10 37 SPECIAL FEATURES H O Polling a document using a subaddress and password Enter the sub address and password to retrieve polling documents stored on a remote machine s bulletin box NOTE First check the bulletin box sub address and password on the remote machine Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Others Next FPolling NOTE You can assign F Polling to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the sub address of the bulletin box then press Enter Fax Functions Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub address and select Enter F Code Polling Sub Address Back Enter 123456 189_ lt se ccs 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the password and then press Enter e Up to 20 digits consisting of numerals and or can be used for passwords o If a password is not required press Enter without entering anything and proceed to step 5
76. 2 7 e Entering an e mail address using the QWERTY keypad on page 4 2 e For details on deleting an address book number see page 2 10 to 2 11 e For details on dialing using the address book see How to dial using address book on page 2 12 e For details on call group dialing see Call group dialing on page 2 14 Entering an e mail address using the QWERTY keypad Enter the e mail address using the QWERTY keypad Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2 4 Press e mail tab Mail Address 4 2 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 5 1 Enter the e mail address using the numeric keys and or the QWERTY key pad Mail Address Enter the recipient s e mail address and select Enter Entry Limit of 50 e mail ehil l sp_ NOTE Up to 50 characters can be entered for each e mail address e For details on character entry see Entering characters on page 1 10 2 Press Enter 6 Press Start Re mail Press Re mail to display the last e mail address you sent to Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2 4 Press Others Prev or Next Re mail NOTE You can assign Re mail to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 Fax Functions select item to edit lt 2082 text FPolling
77. 2005 02 15pm Memory 100 Fa DOM WORKGROUP L starr botas e To go up one step press Back e To return to the first screen press Root NOTE The link should be within 100 characters in length SCANNING 5 87 SCANNING oO If the user name and password are required to login to the file server press UserName Otherwise skip to step 15 Cancel UserName Password 12 Enter the user name then press Enter If your machine is on a windows domain controlled network add the domain name after the user name with an like sam dom_muratec The user name can contain up to 50 characters All ASCII characters are available Network gt UserName Enter the User Name and select Enter Entry Limit ao Cancel UserName MURATEC Password 5 38 SCANNING 14 Enter a password then press Enter The password can contain up to 32 characters All ASCII characters are available Network gt Password Enter the Password and select Enter Entry Limit NOTE The entered password is displayed using asterisks 15 Press Enter Select the line item you want to edit Press Enter to continue 16 If you want to register more shortcuts repeat the procedures from step 5 17 To return to the standby mode press Reset SCANNING 5 39 SCANNING oO Editing a folder shortcut Press Setting 2 Press Scanner Settings Folder Shortcut Add Edit Folder Shortcut S
78. 30 SCANNING Registering a folder shortcut from the browse screen After you find the folder you wish to scan to you may register it as a folder shortcut allowing for instant network scanning to a specified folder Up to 20 shortcuts can be registered After you locate your desired folder select the location and press Bookmark Network Navigation Select folder destination and press Enter Sep Hh 2006 O2 1 Rp m hemor y 1007 DOM_WORKGROUP La STAFF bopere Shared 9 Select a shortcut number using A Y or the numeric keys You can select either a new number or overwrite an existing number Network Navigation Select folder destination and press Enter sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 100 ERa SaaS ngut range 01 20 BJO Would you like to enter 3 Select Yes 4 Register the Shortcut User Name and Password as needed Shortcut Name This is the name that will be displayed on the shortcut key The name can contain up to 24 characters If you do not register a short cut name the folder link will be displayed on the shortcut key e User Name Password If you have entered an user name and password they will be displayed the password will be displayed using asterisks m0 Select item to edit Cancel Shortcut Name Link STAFF SShared UserName MURATEC Password sR SCANNING 5 31 SCANNING oO 5 To Enter the Shortcut name press Shortcut Name 6 Enter a sh
79. 4 or call group dialing See page 2 14 If you specify the destination using the address book proceed to step 8 If you specify it by another method proceed to step 7 7 Press Start 8 The Copy standby mode will be displayed NOTE After the Copy standby mode displays you cannot switch to the Fax standby _ mode by pressing FAX Q Perform copy setting adjustments as needed e Press Stop to cancel Fax amp Copy 10 Press Start FAXING 3 29 Sending faxes with TTI information attached The default setting is TTI 1 Every fax and Internet fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of text at the top of the page This text lists your name fax number date amp time of transmission and page number as shown below You can select the name Date and time either TTI 1 TTI 2 or TTI 3 Your fax number of transmission Page number MAY 52005 02 15pm P 001 001 Your name Fax 1 123 456 7890 THE SLEREXE COMPANY LIMITED SAPORS LANE BOOLE DORSET BH25 8ER TTI information TELEPHONE BOOLE 94513 51617 TELEX 123456 You can select the three types of TTI your name stored in the Specifying the initial settings See pages 1 16 to 1 22 for each transmission Also you can tell the machine whether or not to send the TTI information See page 3 31 IMPORTANT In some countries you are required by law to indicate your name and fax num ber on every
80. 4 Press Others Prev or Next Batch Scan Fax Functions select item to edit OFF OFF OFF ON as ee Cee JCS Options Address Subject Batch Scan FileFormat ON Check Mail TIFF When All tab is selected NOTE You can assign Batch Scan to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 5 1 Press OFF Fax Functions Select ON OFF and press Enter Batch Sean Back Enter 41 scanned pages will be transmitted as one document Each scanned page will be transmitted as an individual document 2 Press Enter twice INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 4 11 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 6 Enter the e mail address You can specify it selecting an address book entry address book number or by entering it manually e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page 3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Select Location to confirm delete recipien To E004 Beth Chicago Office HT 002 Nike London Office EN 004 6eth Chicago Office Others Press Reset to cancel the settings 7 Press Start If you specify the destination using the address book no need to press Start Checking for new e mail e There are two methods for receiving internet faxes using POP as described below 1 At specified time intervals 2 Real time o If you receive only a few documents each day or you want to check the reception immediately use the real time meth
81. 5 O 4 1 Select the function you want to assign to a soft key Copy Functions Select the function to be shown on the standby screen and press Enter Macro Program Combine 2 Press Enter The selected function is assigned to the corresponding soft key 5 If you want to program another soft key repeat the procedures from step 3 To exit the operation press Reset NOTE If a function is already set as a soft key you cannot register that function into another soft key 10 6 SPECIAL FEATURES Macro keys If you perform the same operation repeatedly you can automate the operation using a macro A macro is a series of the several steps grouped together as a single command to accomplish the operation automatically A macro key can record up to 60 steps NOTE Press Reset first when you use other functions within a few minutes after _ executing Macro e When you set the copy protect to ON you cannot use the macro program e You can execute Macro Program from all mode of Copy Fax and Scan by pressing Macro Program See page 10 18 e You can assign Macro Program to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 Registering or editing a Macro In any standby mode press Others Macro Program NOTE When steps have already been registered in Macros the corresponding list of steps for that key will be displayed In that case press Enter 2 Press Enter Edit Macro Program sele
82. 50 NOTE After you edit the e mail address go to step 2 For details on character entry see Entering characters on page 1 10 2 Press Enter NOTE Press Location to review or delete the entered destinations e Press To to toggle between To Cc and Bcc 6 Press Start NOTE You can register the destination in the address book from the display in step 5 1 1 Press Register 2 Following the steps from step 6 in Registering an e mail address using the QWERTY keypad For details see page 2 9 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 4 5 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS Reviewing or canceling commands For details on the Reviewing Commands feature see Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands Advanced mail functions The table below lists the advanced functions that can be used in the Fax mode To select an advanced mail function Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Others 3 Press Prev or Next and select the advanced function See the page numbers indicated for detailed information NOTE If you regularly use an advanced function you can register that function as a default soft key providing instant recall See page 10 2 Advanced function Mail Address Use this to manually enter an e mail address Mail History Displays a history of manually entered e mail p 4 4 addresses up to 20 Displays the last e mail address that you sent p t p Batch Scan Enable or disa
83. A02B002C for F 560 F 520 or US DKUFA02B008C for MFX 2030 MFX 14380 If required this number must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the for mat US DKUFA02B002C for F 560 F 520 or US DKUFA02B008C for MFX 2030 MFX 1480 The digits represented by 02B are the REN without a decimal point Your fax is designed for use on standard device telephone lines The fax connects to the telephone line with a standard line called the USOC RJ 11C A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and tele phone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and require ments adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See installation instructions for details If the equipment MF X 2030 MFX 1430 F 560 F 520 causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary dis
84. Appendix amp Index PECAN O E renne E E eae ne AI 2 Generab secasuenssasaansadunsvienaaveisesrsinatavevssyhio runes aeanineeyeienolaseenvetestietvens Al 2 TA esto carves caters vce ents tite E A dose EAE A AN Al 3 C10 0 een eee O eee nee eee ene A AI 8 PO aa E E A Al 3 CPUC Ty AI EEE E A E E E E Al 4 Consumable WC eresien niese aa n EEEE aati Al 4 Specifications General Multitasking Scanning method Printing method Acceptable document size Document weight Printing paper size Power requirement Power consumption Environmental temperature Relative humidity Display Liquid Crystal Display Image memory capacity Image memory backup time Weight ADF capacity Paper cassette capacity Exit paper tray capacity Dimensions WxDxH AI 2 APPENDIX amp INDEX Quad Access Flatbed CCD LED See page 2 10 See page 2 10 See page 2 12 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Energy save mode Approx 15 W Standby Approx 50 Wh MFX 1430 F 520 Approx 63 Wh MFX 2030 F 560 Maximum Approx 1040 W 10 to 32 C 20 to 80 RH Touch panel display 7 8 MB 650 pages approx plus optional 32 MB additional 2 720 pages approx Using the ITU T test document 1 with normal resolution 7 8 MB 72 hours 39 8 MB 24 hours Must be charged for at least 24 hours to reach full charge MFX 2030 Approx 48 7 lb 22 1 kg MFX 1480 Approx 48 1 lb 21 8 kg F 560 Approx 44 8 lb 20 3 kg F 520 Approx 44 1 lb 20 0 kg
85. Batch Tx Doc 3 Select the batch transmission box in which the documents you want to print are stored Batch Tx Doc Select document and press Enter 1 d001 Sam K New York Office NOTE Empty batch transmission boxes cannot be selected 4 Select the file number you want to print Batch Ix Doc Select file 3 38 FAXING 5 Press Yes to print stored document Batch Tx Doc Select file TiAlready stored ould vou like to print Deleting a document stored in a batch box Press Setting Stored Doc Settings Delete 2 Press Batch Tx Doc Delete Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Doc Box Doc Doc 3 Select the batch transmission box that contains the documents you want to delete Batch Tx Doc Select document and press Enter 1 d001 Sam K New York Office NOTE Empty batch transmission boxes cannot be selected FAXING 3 39 4 Select the file number you want to delete Batch Ix Doc Select file Prev lof 7m Next 5 Press Yes to delete the stored document Batch Tx Doc Select file l dlready stored ould vou like to delete Erasing an empty batch box Batch boxes must be empty in order to be erased If a box has documents stored in it you must delete those before proceeding See Deleting a document stored in a batch box on page 3 39 To erase an empty batch box Press Setting Fax Settings Ba
86. CAN on the control panel Press e mail Press Others mam CG bb m Press Mail History Scan Functions select item to edit Program 1002 Letter OFF ON SCANNING oO Wup les canl Batch ScanFileFormat ddress e mail EW File Name Baal Subject E ii adian NOTE You can assign Mail History to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 5 Select the desired e mail address Use Prev or Next to toggle through the e mail history Mail History Select the address to resend to and press Enter Prev lt tot s gt lent 01211111111 muratec com Oe reese eee A muratec com SCANNING 5 21 6 If you want to edit an existing e mail address use the QWERTY keypad or numeric keys to do so Mail Address Enter the recipient s e mail address and select Enter Entry Limit 29 450 e mai 99939393 muratec co_ 7 Press Enter Re mail This button will recall the last e mail address you sent to Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail 4 Press Others 5 Press Re mail Scan Functions select item to edit Program 100 Letter OFF File Name o ae Fe mail NOTE You can assign Re mail to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 6 The last used e mail address you sent to will be displayed scan Ready Select Location to confirm delete recipient Torabdetg muratec com es O01 Sam New York Office t4003 Carl Faris Off
87. Check the LDAP server UP refer to the Network Guide settings An LDAP server has not been selected Check the LDAP server settings An LDAP server must LDAP server has not been set up To use the advanced search set up the LADP server be registered on your machine prior to searching For more information refer to the Network Guide Auto ratio is set Auto ratio is selected automatically To specify the zoom ratio press Zoom and enter your desired zoom ratio Box in use You tried to erase an F Code box which contains at least one document Erase the document s then try again Broadcast cannot be You tried to set Broadcast to OFF after multiple destinations have been selected turned off Calibrating Scanner Scanner Calibrating Scanner The scanner is warming up now Call Service Code An internal error has occurred Contact your Muratec dealer Cannot change the The cassette tray you selected is used for separator page Select other cassette tray setting for Rx separator cassette Cannot combine with Your selected function cannot be combined with card copy Card copy Cannot enter additional The stored commands are full Wait until one or more jobs are done commands Cannot find the domain DHCP configuration failed Check the Network setting For more information refer to the Network Guide Cannot select mode dur You tried to switch the mode to others while Fax amp Copy mode Changi
88. E lG uresni eE n vem sausasscdicorauece cease suet EESE I 10 Sympos and WEIS serenana EEA I 11 Nan PELUT ES sireni e e EEEN SEED EEEE une wise A E I 12 IG AAT EEE A E EE A AE I 12 Eae I D EEE E E ON ET EN EE AE EE ere I 12 AEE i o EE ET E E EE E I 13 l o ENAS EANAN A E EAE A EEA IEA EE A T I 14 INGE tients seria E E E A A E N ETEA E E E I 15 REAA INS T E E EE AEE EEEE sac E EE EEE T EE E EEE I 15 EE a a PEPEE AEE EN APT EET T E A AAT ATAT ETE A T A TE I 16 P e A E A AA EEE ee E A A A AE EE I 17 Chapter 1 E DI GAN GCG PAA ENEE E EENE TET EE 1 1 Machine OY OP YOY oumirerii ignaga OAT ETEO ETE 1 2 Machine layout ae seaietaanesivcaanoenstie Spgvenmatnesboesioneetitaiobopatiadadoutinassiebiwsverstiiaeoamepavietedactonteasdintenst 1 2 Control panel OVER VICW vsnciciainsseicanncoanssnavostananddlimnacsnsninsencaanadaanbuatuadadatebesansiimeuienawsoaneiuncias 1 3 MCE a S EAA E R 1 4 TVET ioa e rO E A 1 4 Operating the display censes nii nnar aE KETENE 1 4 Displ y COSCE1D AON meniniai aa EEO NENA 1 4 Key displays and TU CUIOINGS sac ccrnia seas sangoeaceucwedcaieanivontumnsesicadenmnacacensonqoaitanwbacuaneacedsawastaseaneonss 1 9 Enternne CCU saersi aAA i 1 10 Momory Dack UD ednini E a a 1 13 aae GCN ee E E E E TE A 1 14 Clearing stored settings occas ens avece susceathe oma easter ea Enni aN anina NAKE r ENANA ANNE Eann iaiia 1 14 Getting started ssirsrsrnsiirssssriirdsbnsrsn raius nia kad rad bner ENE EE Aaka N EEEIEE i 1 15 Specifying the initia
89. ECIAL FEATURES 10 11 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O Editing macro key titles The Macro key titles can be edited In any standby mode press Others Macro Program Enter 2 Press Edit Title 3 Select the macro key whose title you want to edit 4 Edit the macro name as you want e The title can contain up to 60 characters For details on character entry refer to page 1 10 Macro Name Name the macro key and select Enter Entry Limit 20 Cancel Macro Name Sort Copy Reduce 812 5 Press Enter to save the title To edit another title repeat from step 3 6 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 10 12 SPECIAL FEATURES Executing a Macro command In any standby mode press Others Macro Program 2 Press the macro key you want to run If you want to stop the macro operation in progress press Stop Run select the procedure vou want to execute press Enter to return to previous menu T Soart Copy Reduce 812 SPECIAL FEATURES 10 18 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O Program one touch By registering advanced communications in a program one touch you can perform a multi step operation by simply pressing one key You can register the following functions e Delayed transmission e Polling e F code polling e F code transmission Delayed transmissions can be combined with any of the other three operations Registering or editing a program one touch This describes the procedure for registering a
90. F code commu nication see F code box feature on page 10 21 NOTE For polling to work the remote machine must be set up to be polled Regular polling To set up your machine for regular polling Make sure the document is loaded in the remote fax machine 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others 4 Press Polling NOTE You can assign Polling to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 5 1 Select ON to perform polling Fax Functions Select ON OFF and press Enter kA This mode will allow you to retrieve a document from a remote fas machine 2 Press Enter 6 Press Enter to return to the standby display Specify the destination and press Start NOTE After pressing Start you can stop the communication using the Review Com mandes feature See page 6 1 3 50 FAXING Fax forwarding This feature tells the machine to forward the received document automatically to another destination You can set the time period for the machine to perform this procedure NOTE Fax forwarding is not compatible with polling documents e Fax forwarding is not available with the Tel Ready reception mode The fax forwarding settings are different depending on your network connection e When your machine is connected to the network The fax forwarding settings must be configured using a web browser You can configure the detailed transfer rule From the control panel o
91. G 5 17 SCANNING oO NOTE Not Use is the default search criteria If you enter character s in the Name Fax or e mail field this button will change to Any If you want to use criteria other than Any select this button to view other selection 6 Press Any to change the criterion if needed Advanced Search e tay search parameter s and select MeCUte a Select desired criterion Advanced Search Select the Serach Method and press Enter serach Method This will search any inforation that has been entered into the line item including blanks ANY 0000 Searches any information in this field including blanks Initial Searches for contacts that begin with the characters entered in this field Final Searches for contacts that end with the characters entered in this field Equal Searches for contacts that match exactly with the information entered in this field Not Use Information in this field including blanks will not be used for searching 7 Press Enter 8 Press Execute 5 18 SCANNING Q The search results will be displayed If there are no results Hit 0000 will be displayed Press Page Up and Page Down to view all the results If the address displayed is from the LDAP server it will have an 2 next to it Select this button to view the contact information and or register the contact into your address book Select Clos
92. GETTING STARTED Selecting the default TTI Select the TTI that will be used most often Press Default TTI 2 Select the TTI to be shown at the top of faxes you send User Install Select the Default TTI and press Enter Default TTI 1 Dallas Office General dep 3 Press Enter to save the setting Entering your fax number Press TTI Number 2 Use the numeric key to enter the TTI number your fax machine s phone num ber This number can contain up to 20 characters User Install Enter your fax number and select Enter TTI Number 123456 890_ Ca JL gt Site J J e To enter symbol before your country code press To make long numbers easier to read press to enter it e To erase a number press Clear e To change just one number press lt or gt to move the cursor then press Clear to erase the number Then re enter the correct number GETTING STARTED 1 21 GETTING STARTED Time Zone Time zones refer to the difference in time up to 12 hours between countries from the Greenwich Observatory in England which is taken to be standard time and to regions that use the same difference Press Time Zone 2 Use the numeric keys to enter your time zone User Install Enter the time zone and select Enter Time fone 0 00 Press these keys to move the cursor Press this key to change between and as Exa
93. Horma li Letter TOs NOTE You can change the default setting for Sort See Accessing the copy settings on page 12 3 CoPYING 7 13 COPYING Combine Multiple originals can be copied into an arrangement on one sheet of paper Document orientation on the ADF Result image of combined copy or document glass e In case of 2 in 1 NOTE For enlargement copy you can only use the document glass e This machine does not have an image rotation function Set the document 2 Press COPY to display the Copy standby mode 3 Press Others Combine NOTE You can assign Combine to the soft key See Soft keys on pages 10 2 to 10 6 4 Select the number of document to be combined on to one sheet of paper Copy Functions select the number of documents you want to combine and press Enter Camb ine __faavance Back Enter aH eur e When you set an advanced function proceed to step 5 e When you do not set an advanced function proceed to step 8 5 Press Advance 7 14 COPYING Selecting the paper 6 1 When selecting the paper press Paper 2 Select the paper Combine Select the paper source and press Enter Paper Back WfEnter 3 Press Enter Setting the magnification The magnification is automatically set However you can change the copy magnifi cation in the following steps 7 1 Press Ratio to change the copy magnification 2 Select a
94. ING Set the document in the ADF 1 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Specify the destination Fax Re ady Fax Ready Mode sep 2b Memory 100 e Te Search Add Edit OFM yz M001 Sam New York Office F Normali 001 San New York Office OFF History e Use the numeric keys to dial the number e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page 3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 Press Reset to cancel the settings 3 Press Start scanning Press Stop to stop scanning Memory 1002 Comm No 001 ROOT SamNew York Office W002 Mike London Office Fage 001 Doc Size Letter Hest doc 4 Press Yes while scanning the document Scanning Press Stop to stop scanning Y Z 2 c Memory 1002 Comm Ho 001 ROOT Sam New York Office EHOO2 Mike London Office Fage 001 Doc Size Letter Hest doc 5 When scanning is completed set the next document on the document glass 6 Press Next Doc The next document will be scanned Set next document Set documents and press Start Memory 1002 Comm No 001 ROOT SamNew York Office EHO02 Mike London Office Fage 001 Doc Size Letter 7 Press Tx Start when all the documents have been scanned Transmission will begin e Press Stop to cancel the scan e Transmission will also begin when Start is pressed FA
95. N Ai E seve E E E E E 7 9 Number of CORTES osasse a EE E 7 9 Advanced copy HUG IONS srera eieiaeo en e Enn EA eeN Eia NNE Ea SS 7 10 Selecting the paper S1ZC cccccccesssssccccesssscssccesssseeeeessseesceeseeees 7 11 LOOT O a A AA E AE EA S 7 12 Atomai e SO BIN errira E EEE E Ea 7 13 OMAN AG ceo es nethete EE E E E 7 14 DOS CODY severe staspavaovnecavasiatssestaasacosnue ds cectivsnenodutajaosenstesaaneaceuetatsess 7 16 OF 0 ih 0 0 aan een rr ne Re nO Pg a 7 25 Specifying the document size tO COPY cccccessssssseesssseeeceeseeees 1 27 Checking THE COPY print QUE igevsseccacivevatzealcarienhetaydoscsbodesnnteabdenaeids 7 28 Before copying Document and paper handling Before you begin making copies please read the information mentioned on pages 1 24 to 1 82 Memory overflow message If the memory overflows while scanning the first page Press Stop to return to the standby mode Change the resolution or wait until memory becomes available before trying to copy again Memory overflow Press Stop Doc Tyne ff Auto a Norma lg ae Letter OFF Ag lt 7 If the memory overflows while scanning page 2 e Press Yes to copy the stored pages e Press No to cancel the copy job Change the resolution or wait until memory becomes available before trying to copy again NOTE The following display is shown when the documents still remain Se 01 Set a ress Stop to end the job Press
96. NG THE ADDRESS Book 5 1 Enter the destinations name Name Enter the contact name and select Enter Entry Limit 157 30 Name Taro Tokyo Offi The name field must be registered e Up to 30 characters can be entered e For details on character entry see page 1 10 2 Press Enter 6 1 Press Fax No 2 Use the numeric keys to enter the destinations fax number Up to 40 digits 006 Taro Tokyo Office You must register either the fax number or e mail address e Pause and other dialing symbols can be also entered See Special dialing characters on page 2 3 3 Press Enter USING THE ADDRESS Book 2 5 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK N 2 6 7 Ifyou want to add this destination to a call group You can add either the fax number e mail address or both to a call group e Call groups must be registered in advance For details on registering call groups see page 2 14 e Up to 32 groups can be registered 1 Press Group 2 Select the applicable group s 006 Taro Tokyo Office select the groupis to add this contact to and press Enter row O Group 01 S Group Od eene o Group O68 S Group OA 8 Group OSI b Group OY S Group 10 3 Press Enter If you want to enter the e mail address 1 Press e mail 2 Enter the e mail address e mail Enter the contacts e mail address and select Enter Entry Limit 187 450 e mai l taro h muratec com You must register
97. NGS Management settings You can customize settings on your machine to match your needs Accessing the management settings Press Setting Management 2 Set or change the selected items using Prev and Next Management Select item to edit Prev 4 1of3 Next For details on each setting refer to the following table 3 When you are finished press Reset to return to the standby mode The underlined settings are factory defaults Network Set You can configure the network settings to use your machine on the TCP IP For details of network tings network settings see Network Guide contained in this product Soft Key You can change the Soft keys displayed in the standby mode See Programming a soft key on page 10 5 Auto Reset This sets the period of time before the copy fax scanner display returns to the Time standby mode Copy and Scanner screens Reset time When the machine does not operate for a set period of e Reset time time after copying or scanning is completed the selected 1 to 10 minutes settings are reset returned to their original values The 3 minutes reset time can be set Reset After Scan Setting it to ON resets the resolution resizing and other Reset After Scan settings after the document is scanned Setting it to OFF resets the values after the selected reset time has elapsed Fax screen When the machine does not operate for a set period of time after
98. O8 S Groug OY S Group 10 7 Press Enter Using address book number If you know the address book number you can quickly send to that location by entering that number The destinations are numbered when they are registered Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail 4 Press Others 5 Press Address Book scan Funct ions Select item to edit Enter Program 1002 Letter OFF Dup lesscanj Batch ScanjFileFormat MEER e mail Mai l Subject History File Name NOTE You can assign Address Book to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 5 14 SCANNING 6 Use A YV or the numeric keys and enter the address book number scan Functions Use the numeric keypad or arrow keys to enter the address book location and select Enter Address Book Back Enter Input range 001 300 00l Sam KeNew York Office a w g This will send to a pre registered address book location 7 Press Enter Searching for an e mail address You can quickly search for a contact located in your machine side address book or on an LDAP server NOTE In order to search an LDAP server the server must be registered in advance For more information about set up see the Network Guide Simple search You can search for an e mail address by entering the contact name part of the contact name or a part of the e mail address Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e
99. Occasionally your machine encounters some trouble transmitting or receiving docu ments When it does an alarm will sound alerting you to the issue You can identify the problem with by reading the displayed or printed messages Message on the display Description Solution Sort must be turned You tried to set Sort to OFF while Duplex Copy Duplex Copy should be combined On when making a with sort duplex copy Add Edit cannot be You cannot add enter destinations to the Address Book while selecting other destina performed tions ADF is unavailable You tried to make a Card Copy using the ADF Use the document glass Set the document on the FBS glass ADF used in the feeder command There is a delayed manual transmission to be sent To edit the Fax Setting or run a Macro program wait until the job is done or cancel the job Already stored You tried to select a number that has already been selected Enter a different number An attachment cannot You tried to scan to folder with files attached and save them to the same folder where be scanned to the folder the attached files are originally saved from which it was added An I D Code is needed You cannot set 0000 as an I D Code for Security box An LDAP server has The advanced search failed due to an internal machine error Check the LDAP server not been registered setting again and try the search again For more information about LDAP server set
100. PC Faxing See page 8 1 Why move if you don t have to Use the PC fax application to quickly send docu ments from your desktop to remote fax machines The intuitive address book is easy to navigate to find a destination Mail MDNIDSN Reporting See Network Guide When sending e mail you may request a delivery status notification DSN which confirms whether the mail was received and or a message disposition notification MDN which confirms whether the mail was read Fax Mail Address Book See page 2 1 Store important contact information into your machines address book for one touch recall Each contact can have a fax number e mail address and group s associated with them Mixed Broadcasting See page 3 24 Your machine can quickly send to both e mail and fax destinations at the same time eliminating the need to manually send each document I 15 Directory Searching LDAP See page 5 17 Finding important contacts has never been easier Press the Search on the display to quickly locate contacts whether they reside in the machine side address book or on a shared company directory Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Memory 1002 Scan Ready Memory 1002 N F Norma g i 0 OFF Address a cee Iles rey Personal Shared Directories With the OfficeBridge expansion kit installed you can keep personal contacts sepa rate from the general directory This allows for quick secure access to your private conta
101. Prev 2of 3b Next Journal Line Up DFF Depart Management isplay Jobs in Queue Copy Protect OFF 4 Press FaxReceive Document Display Jobs in Queue Select item to edit FaxReceive Document Copy The number status of jobs in queue can be checked 3 18 FAXING 5 This displays the intercepted reception print queue status Display Jobs in Queue FaxRece i velocument O01 14 54 London Office NOTE Documents stored in memory will automatically print when printing becomes available FAXING 3 19 Settings for fax reception Setting the number of rings Default setting Twice You can set how many times your machine will ring before answering a call Choose from 2 to 15 rings Press Setting Fax Settings Other Settings Redial Attempts 2 Use A YV or the numeric keys to enter the number of rings 3 Press Enter to save the setting 4 Press Reset to exit and return to the standby mode Print settings You can set three parameters for printing received fax documents e Rx reduction rate e Reduction margin e Paper save function All three can be set in the same procedure mentioned on next page Each description is as follows Reception reduction rate Reception reduction lets you set the machine to reduce large incoming documents to a size that fits the paper in your machine This setting doesn t affect your machine s copying capabilities Below are the options for
102. QWERTY keypad Select the numbers to be entered from the QWERTY keypad Enter the contact name and select Enter Entry Limit Br al 1 12 GETTING STARTED Entering spaces To enter a space press Space while entering Name Enter the contact name and select Enter Entry Limit ths Deleting Inserting characters To delete a character use lt 4 gt to move the cursor to the character you want to delete and then press Delete To insert a character use lt gt to move the cursor to the insert position and enter the character NOTE The last entered character can be deleted by pressing Delete Memory back up Image data stored in memory is held under the following conditions even if a power failure occurs or the machine is shut down e Image data stored in memory is held for the following period of time Note that the power of the machine should be turned ON for at least 24 hours beforehand e The time it takes for data back up depends on the size of the memory 8 MB Approx 72 hours standard memory 40 MB Approx 24 hours if the 32 MB Memory Extension kit is installed When you turn the power ON after it is OFF for a long period the Time Setting display may appear In this case be sure to perform the time setting before using the machine You cannot use the machine without the time setting GETTING STARTED 1 13 GETTING STARTED Initial setup Clearing stored settings Before usi
103. REPORT amp Lists 13 9 REPORT amp LISTS WW Erased document notification e When documents stored in memory are accidentally erased a notification will be printed when the power has been restored that outlines the erased documents information e The following is an example of a received file that has been erased In addition Command erased Erased Poll Documents and F Code box document erased may be printed NewYork Office Fax 123 456 4890 Documents Erased May 5 2005 02 15pm Ped ne Warne sae Start Tie Tie Pe Ree ote foo carrie ort ova oar pox Frese out of paper Rx docs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 No Number of the communication 8 Remarks 2 Name Registered in the following order Manual Manual reception l 1 TTI number registered for the I Fax Internet fax reception destination name PC FAX 2 Space 3 Mode Resolution used for the communication 4 Start Time Time the communication started 5 Time Time required for the communication 6 Page Number of pages received 7 Result Communications results OK Completed normally n Communicated in ECM mode Communicated via super G3 Error code Finished abnormally For information regarding error codes refer to page 14 24 13 10 REPORT amp LISTS Chapter Ji 4 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting IVI TN EVA TNC aae E EES R E E EEE TEONE 14 2 Cleaning tipS eseessseesssresesse
104. Ready Set Select the paper type and press Enter 3 Press Enter CoPYING 7 11 COPYING BA Zoom ratio This machine allows you to reduce the image you are copying There are three ways to enter the zoom ratio Using preset ratios Press Zoom 2 Select the following preset ratio Copy Ready arti Use the arrows or numeric keypad to select the zoom ratio and press Enter e 50 Min e 64 Letter 8 5 x 11 gt Half letter 5 5 x 8 5 e 78 Legal 8 5 x 14 gt Letter 8 5 x 11 100 e 121 Legal 8 5 x 14 gt 11 x 17 e 129 Letter 8 5 x 11 gt 11 x 17 e 154 Half letter 5 5 x 8 5 gt Legal 8 5 x 14 NOTE For enlargement copy you can only use the document glass 3 Press Enter Adjusting the ratio 1 increments Press Zoom 2 Adjust the ratio by using or You can set the magnification from 25 to 100 for the ADF from 25 to 400 for the document glass 3 Press Enter Manually enter the ratio Press Zoom 2 Use the numeric keys to enter your desired ratio You can set the magnification from 25 to 100 for the ADF from 25 to 400 for the document glass 3 Press Enter 7 12 COPYING Automatic sorting Copy jobs can be collated into indivdual sets meaning they are ready for office distribution To enable disable automatic sorting ON and OFF toggle every time you press Sort Set 01 Memory 100 Auto
105. Sam K PO FAx 0001 11 10 00am BrdCast Delayed Commands 003 11 10 00am ErdCast PC Fax 0002 13 01 30pm BOOT Taro H Tokvo Delayed Commands 004 15 09 00am W005 Chang Batch Tx 001 01 12 00am W004 Beth W Chicaz NOTE BrdCast will be displayed for group transmission and broadcast transmission 6 2 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS 4 Ifyou want to cancel a command select the command you want to cancel The confirmation message will appear 5 Press Yes to cancel the selected command Otherwise press No Delayed Commands Select the location to cancel the transmission Delayed Commands 001 30 02 14pm anml Would you like to delete NOTE e If the selected command was being transmitted communication will be can celed e You can cancel the destinations for broadcast transmission individually when the broadcast command in progress See Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast on page 6 4 6 To cancel other command repeat procedures from step 4 Press Reset to return to the standby mode REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS 6 3 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast You can also review or cancel certain destinations within a broadcast NOTE When the broadcast command is in progress you can cancel the destinations individually However you cannot cancel the destinations individually for the reserved command such as with delayed transmission Reserved
106. Sending a document using the mail history 5 21 e e 1 EEE EEEE A E 5 22 Reviewing or changing your selected destinations 0 5 23 Adding a text message to your e Mail eseerecrsererrrserrerrssere 5 24 01671 21 0 8 e gente ne ne ne een eee E 5 28 Scanning documents into a folder ccccccccssssscsseesssseeseeesees 5 28 Scanning documents using a folder shortcut ccccccccceeeeees 5 33 Reviewing or canceling selected folders cccescccceesssseeeeeens 5 34 Registering or editing a folder shortcut 5 35 AN O AY UE e A R E 5 42 Scanning documents to an FTP server cccecccsceesssseeeeeeseees 5 42 Registering an FTP server to a shortcut eerren 5 45 Scanning documents using an FTP shortcut cccccceeeeees 5 47 Reviewing or canceling selected FTP servers ccecce 5 48 Registering or editing an FTP server shortcut eccer 5 49 Advanced NEON Sessera a E EE EEEa 5 56 ONO ETE E A ES E E E ET 5 56 POG WN oes E A EE E EA E geeneteane 5 57 Ba G oC e ER 5 59 Selecting the file format eeeeeceeeseeessesrerrserrerrsssreerrserererssrrerrssene 5 60 Duplex scan NN erae ETE ERRA 5 61 TSO ACC 1s UIT en aa E E E E teens 5 63 Attaching additional files to the scanned document 5 64 Before scanning You can customize your job prior to scanning Resolution You can select either 200 dpi 300 dpi or 600 dpi scan resolutions for monochrome scanning or 100dpi 200dpi 300
107. Store Doc Settings Select item to edit Press Enter to continue 4 Press Polling Doc store Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Polling Doc Box Doc 5 Press Yes store Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Polling Doc Store document NOTE Once the remote fax machine polls the document you stored your machine will automatically erase the document from memory 3 42 FAXING Printing a stored polling document To print a polling document without deleting it press Setting Store Doc Set tings Print Polling Doc then Yes Deleting a stored polling document To delete a polling document from your machine s memory Press Setting Store Doc Settings Delete Polling Doc then Yes If you want to quit the operation without deleting press No Overseas transmission When transmitting overseas the transmission reliability can be improved This function is available only when sending faxes Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Others 3 Press Prev or Next then press OverseasTx e ON and OFF toggle every time you press OverseasTx NOTE You can assign OverseasTx to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 e You can change the default setting for OverseasTx See Accessing the default settings on page 12 4 4 Press Enter 5 Enter the fax number and send the fax FAXING 3 43 Using an
108. TINGS The underlined settings are the factory defaults Redial Attempts This sets the number of times for redial attempts when the destination line is busy The 2 15 times 2 interval between redial attempts is set at Redial Interval times Redial Interval This sets the interval between redial attempts 1 5 minutes 1 minute Block Junk Fax This function enables you to block receipt of unnecessary faxes See page 3 46 Number of This sets the number of times the machine will ring before fax reception when the recep 1 10 times 2 Rings tion mode is set to Fax or Tel Fax times Dialing Pause This sets the default for the dialing interval 2 10 seconds when the pause symbol is 2 10 seconds 2 input seconds Super Fine This sets the dpi for resolution when a document is scanned for S Fine transmission If 600dpi Resolution 600 dpi is set the scan is sharper than with 400 dpi however it may result in memory 400dpi overflow when the document is sent Rx Reduction Select from Auto which automatically selects the magnification according to the length Auto Rate of the received document or 100 to have all faxes printed out at the same rate of 100 See page 3 20 reduction Reduction This sets at what point the document printout will extend to the following page if the 0 0 3 3 inches Margin received document cannot fit within the effective recordable area 1 5 inches See page 3 20 Paper Saving
109. The subject can contain up to 80 characters subject Enter the subject line and select Enter Entry Limit 14 B Cancel Enter Subject E mail Message_ 7 Press Enter 8 Press Mail Text Add a subject line and mes or select a template then press Enter Back Enter Subject E mail Message Mail Text This is an E mail message WIF le Temiar O Enter the text message NOTE The mail text can contain up to 1024 characters Return is counted as two characters and can be used twice Mail Text Enter the mail text and select Enter Entry Limit 61 1024 Mail Text Please see the file attached ld 4 8 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 10 To view the entire text message press View Text Use the arrows to view all the text Press Enter to close to return to the QWERTY keypad Mail Text Enter the mail text and select Enter Entry Limit 61 1024 This is an E mail massaze W Please see the file attached W Press Enter until address book appears 12 Select a destination s 13 Press Start Using a registered template You can select a registered template to simplify the entry process You can register up to ten templates NOTE The template should be registered in advance See the Network Guide for instruction Set the document Press Others Prev or Next Press e mail Subject oO A GC N m Press Template e mai lSubject A
110. Touch Select a program one touch key Prev lof 3b Next 01 1111 72222 02 9393 4444 03 5555 6666 04 d001 003 6 When the confirmation message appears press Yes to execute it Program One Touch Select a program one touch key 1 1111 172222 O Would vou like to execute 10 20 SPECIAL FEATURES F code box feature F code introduction The ITU T the United Nations agency that standardizes international telecom munications has created the fax industry standard for using subaddressing and password based communication With subaddressing your machine can perform secure transmissions and polling Another term for subaddressing is F code which Muratec uses on the machine display and in the instruction manual Guidelines for using F code 1 Before creating an F code box you must know if the remote fax machine is com patible with the ITU T subaddressing protocol and that this feature is active on the machine 2 To permit the other party to send or poll documents from your F code boxes you must create an F code box in your machine and the other party must know your F code box s subaddress and password 3 To send or poll the remote fax machine s F code boxes you have to know their subaddress and password Registering or editing an F code box The elements of creating an F code box are as follows Box Name You can assign an identifier name for each F code box The name can contain
111. Without consumables and tray Up to 80 sheets Letter 75 g m or 20 lb paper Paper cassette 500 sheets 80 g m or 20 lb paper Bypass tray 50 sheets 80 g m or 20 lb paper 250 sheets 80 g m or 20 lb paper 20 5 x 19 3 x 17 6 in 520 x 490 x 446 mm Fax Compatibility Applicable line Coding method Modem speed Address book Call group Broadcasting Transmission speed Scanning width Grayscale Scanning resolution Copy Scanning resolution Scanning width Print speed Zoom ratio Preset ratio Printer Print resolution Print speed Color Mono Operating system Printer language Interface ITU T Group 3 and Super Group 3 Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN or equivalent ITU T standard MMR MR MH and JBIG 33 600 31 200 28 800 26 400 24 000 21 600 19 200 16 800 14 400 12 000 9 600 7 200 4 800 2 400 bps Automatic fallback Up to 300 destinations can be stored 32 groups 330 destinations Approx 3 seconds page Based on memory to memory transmission of ITU T test document 1 to a Muratec fax machine Your transmission times will vary but your machine always will provide the fastest transmission speeds possible under ITU T guidelines and phone line conditions 8 2 in 208 mm 256 levels Normal 8 dots mm x 3 85 lines mm Fine 8 dots mm x 7 7 lines mm Super fine 16 dots mm x 15 4 lines mm In the case that the remote fax has the ability of 16 dots mm
112. X 2030 MFX 1430 only 2 The duplex printing unit is required When the duplex printing unit is not installed DuplexScan will be displayed ard Copy Use this to set the card copy Use this to set the magnification for copying p 7 12 Makes on off setting for sort copy p 7 13 10 2 SPECIAL FEATURES Fax I Fax mode Each tab can have the same set of soft keys or you can customize each tab s soft keys Macro Program Use tnis to perform hemacroprgam V por Renin Use tnis to ser the seamingresatin v naa Address Book Use this to specify the destination by the address book v p 2 12 number lt SIS Fax Forward Makes on off setting for fax forwarding Fax amp Copy Makes on off setting for Fax amp Copy p 3 51 v p 3 28 p 10 20 p 2 16 p 11 5 p 3 31 p 3 30 p 3 32 p 13 8 Program One Touch Use this to perform program one touch Group Tx Use this to make a group transmission Security Rx Makes on off setting for security reception TTI Select Select the TTI to be sent Cover Page Makes on off setting for cover page v p 3 34 p 3 35 v p 3 41 p 3 50 p 10 38 p 10 37 p 3 43 1 F Code Tx Use this to make a F code transmission Overseas Tx Makes on off setting for overseas transmission TTI Makes on off setting for TTI sending Memory Tx Makes on off setting for memory transmission Dialing Options Use this to enter a dialing character Broadcast Use this to make a broadcasting Ma
113. XING 3 11 Document glass gt ADF 1 2 3 Set the document on the document glass 1 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Specify the destination Fay Ready Fax Ready Mode Memory 1002 jorli Search Add Edit 001 Sam New York Office P J EI001 Sam New York Office FF 002 Mike London Office 002 Mike London Office P H003 Carl Paris Office History Ji Others j e Use the numeric keys to dial the number e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page 3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 Press Reset to cancel the settings Press Start to stop scanning 5 005 02 15pm Memory 100 Comm Ho 001 W001 SamNew York Office FAO02 Mike London Office Page 001 Doc Size Letter 4 When scanning is completed set the next document in the ADF 5 Press Next Doc Document scanning will begin Set next document Set documents and press Start Memory 100 EA Comm No 001 Normali HOO Sam New York Office RAOO2 Mike London Office Fage 001 Doc 5ize Letter 6 Transmission will start when scanning has been completed e Press Stop to cancel the scan 3 12 FAXING Redialing Automatic fax redialing If the transmission failed because the line was busy Auto Redial will be displayed and the machine will automatically redial the number up to twice in one min
114. achine will beep once at the end of each reception When a voice call comes in your machine will alert you with a special ring The telephone connected to your machine will not ring If you hear the machine ringing pick up the handset You will need e An optional handset or an external phone connection Ans Fax Ready Mode Use it if You are connecting an answering machine to your machine In this mode An answering machine connected to your machine will answer each call If a voice call comes in the answering machine will record the incoming mes sage If your machine hears a fax tone it will begin receiving the fax message You will need e An optional handset or an external phone connection 3 16 FAXING Using an answering machine with your machine Set the machine to Ans Fax Ready Mode See Selecting the reception mode on page 3 15 2 Set your answering machine to answer calls after no more than two rings 3 Create a new outgoing message on your answering machine Your answering machine s outgoing message should be no longer than 10 sec onds Answering calls manually NOTE To answer a call manually you must install an optional handset or an exter nal phone to your machine e Make sure there are no documents in the ADF Receiving a call manually with an optional handset or an external phone In Tel Ready Mode or Tel Fax Ready Mode when the optional handset or exter nal
115. activate when Calibrating Scanner appears in the display e When the print error occurs ex out of paper status paper jam e When the telephone line is used e When cooling fan is rotating e For the Energy Save Mode setting see page 12 12 e Only the display backlight will be turned out in the following cases e When the machine is not used for more than 10 minutes The backlight may not be turned out in some cases such as while scanning documents e When printing received documents of fax internet fax during PC printing or when automatically printing lists ex check message in the Energy Save mode To turn on the backlight press any key on the display or on the control panel GETTING STARTED 1 23 GETTING STARTED Document and paper handling Document handling Be sure to read the following guidelines before you begin faxing copying or scan ning Acceptable documents LU ADF Single sheet Multiple sheet Size Max 8 5 x 35 43 in Max 8 5 x 14 in W x L 216 x 900 mm 216 x 356 mm Min 4 72 x 3 94 in Min 8 5 x 5 49 in 120 x 100 mm 216 x 139 5 mm Quantity 1 sheet Max 80 sheets of Letter Legal or Half letter y size sheets 75 g m or 201b paper Weight 35 0 to 128 0 g m 52 0 to 105 0 g m 0 05 to 0 15 mm 0 07 to 0 12 mm Document Plain paper Plain paper type Real time transmission with super fine resolution 8 5 x 14 in 216 x 356 mm O Document glass The do
116. agement ON cccccsesscssesscessesecssessesscsscesessscsecsscsessesesesesaseaes 11 17 Using department CO CS atetes ce cen cane seeneszavenoanatacaatoas oncucone sennethasmnentstaunaaaaienennetamenttiacaue 11 17 Printing a list of department management settings cccccccceesssssceeeeessseeeeeeeens 11 19 Resetting the department COUNCEL cccccccsssssceceessssccesceeesssseecccesssseeeceecesseeeeeeeeens 11 20 Turning department management protection On Off 0 cece ccceeessccceeesssteeeeeeeens 11 21 Copy 0G CO neninn aS ENE AE EREE E EA ATRE 11 22 Chapter 12 Mache Ser EN aara E 12 1 Machine setting MENU sssrinin inoitia rina ei Na A AANE NENANA AA NEENA ONAE 12 2 Doaa aT E EE A E E E EE E A E E E E E E 12 3 Accessing the copy settings sessseresssssrressssrersssssrereeserreeresssrreesssereesssssreresssereeresssrrees 12 3 RET T A E EEEE E EE S E E E E E N 12 4 Accessing the default fax settings ccccccccccssssccssssseceessseccesssssccessssesccssssseceessseeeessnes 12 4 Accessing other fax settini nrsnenoniensanrasniesiir narii aN aa ETE Rai Tenin 12 5 Scanner settings eesessseresesereesssserettsssstttttsttttt ttrt tt ttes sentrene SSS etette Sstt EEES E EEEE Eees ne eee eesne eene ene 12 7 Accessing the default scan settings cccccccccccssssscccesessseccceessseeecceesssseeeecessssseeceeeess 12 7 Accessing other Scan Setting ccccccccccssssssccceessssceeccessssseccceeesseeeeceeesseeeeecessessaeeee
117. ally delete any document stored in memory during the last operation You can change the reset time For details see Accessing the management set tings on page 12 11 FAXING Sending a fax Memory transmission Sending a fax using the ADF Set the document in the ADF See page 1 25 for details 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2 4 Set the various functions if necessary 5 Specify the destination Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode sep 26 Memory 100 i H Peso Pti onilearch Add Edit OFM yz a M001 Sam New York Office P Normal i E001 Sam New York Office Broadcast jg OFFI History e Use the numeric keys to dial the number _or e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 _or e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page 3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 Press Reset to cancel the settings 6 Press Start If you specify the destination using the address book no need to press Start NOTE If you want to cancel a transmission while the document is scanning press Stop If you want to cancel a transmission that is in progress use the Review Com mands feature See Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands on page 6 1 e Transmission reservation can be performed while communicating The reserved transmission will start when the c
118. alternative telephone network service provider Dial prefix When you make a call you may want to use an alternative telephone network service provider to take advantage of lower rates You can store the access codes in the Dial Prefix key The following information describes how to program the access number 1 Press Setting 2 Press Fax Settings 3 Press Other Settings 4 1 Press Prev 2 Press PreF ix Other Settings select item to edit Prev 4 Sof aD Next 5 1 Enter the dial prefix number using the numeric keys Other Settings Enter the dial prefix and select Enter e i 111 P_ Ses ccc NOTE You can enter numbers up to 40 digits including numbers Pause and Tone Note that Pause and Tone will be counted as 2 characters each o If you must wait for another dial tone at dialing press Pause to insert a pause P at the end of the access number 2 Press Enter 6 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 3 44 FAXING Sending faxes using the Dial prefix feature To dial using the numeric keys Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others 4 1 Press Prev or Next 2 Press Dialing Options NOTE You can assign Dialing Options to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 5 1 Press PreF ix then enter the fax number using the numeric keys Fax Functions Enter the recipient s fax number and select
119. ame Function Message Area Displays the machine s current status operation instructions error messages and other information Time Display Displays the current date time and amount of scan memory and Memory available Shortcut List Displays the registered folder shortcuts Soft Keys Displays five functions frequently used You can assign other functions to soft key according your needs See Soft key on page 10 2 Press this to display the various scan functions Browse Press this to browse through the network Used to save the scanned image to your desired folder Add Edit Adds or edits the folder shortcuts GETTING STARTED 1 7 GETTING STARTED Sean standby mode scan to FTP FTP Select Sa sep 26 2005 02 15p Memory 100 Resolution Host hdd Edit 200dn ost B01 12545678901 25456789012 Normal muOd Nge ser c mexico_z amp AUTOMNESOS FTP shortcut 4 1 OFF ale 11 abcdefghi EFGH JKLMN 9 others _ Time Display and Memory evIS FTP shortcut 12 F E shortcut 13 Shortcut List Name Function Message Area Displays the machine s current status operation instructions error messages and other information Time Display Displays the current date time and amount of scan memory and Memory available Shortcut List Displays the registered FTP server shortcuts Soft Keys Displays five functions frequently used You can assign other functions to sof
120. an mode is now activated 4 Press Color again to return to the monochrome scan setting 5 56 SCANNING Zoom Use this function to reduce or enlarge the document image The available zoom ratio is as follows Range 300dpi 600dpi 50 100 50 200 200dpi 75 100 75 200 Preset ratio 300dpi 600dpi 50 64 78 100 50 64 78 100 121 129 154 200dpi 78 100 78 100 121 NOTE For enlargement copy you can only use the document glass MFX 2030 MFX 1430 only e This function is not available when scanning a color document e You can assign Zoom to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 5 Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press Others scan Ready SCANNING Memory 100 4 Press Zoom Scan Functions Select item to edit A a Program l Letter OFF Duplexscan batch Scan FileFormat dddress e mail Mai SCANNING 5 57 5 There are three ways to enter the zoom ratio Select a preset zoom ratio key Scan Functions Use the numeric keypad or arrow keys to adjust the zoom ratio and select Enter Enlarge 1543 1293 1213 50 e 64 Letter 8 5 x 11 gt Half letter 5 5 x 8 5 e 78 Legal 8 5 x 14 gt Letter 8 5 x 11 e 100 e 121 Legal 8 5 x 14 gt 11 x 17 e 129 Letter 8 5 x 11 gt 11 x 17 e 154 Half letter 5 5 x 8 5 gt
121. another number repeat from step 6 Press Reset to return to the standby mode Deleting a number from the blocked numbers list To delete a number from the list Press Setting Fax Settings Other Settings Block Junk Fax 2 Press Delete Block Junk Fax Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Setting oo enter Edit Miele 3 Select the number you want to delete Delete select a number to delete Press Enter to continue 01 11223344 02 55667706 03 99001122 3 48 FAXING 4 Press Yes to delete Delete select a number to delete Press Enter to continue 01 11229344 Would you like to delete NOTE Press No to return to step 3 without deleting the number 5 The selected number will be deleted To delete another number repeat from step 3 Press Reset to return to the standby mode Printing a list of the blocked numbers To print a list of blocked numbers press Setting List Other Lists Block Junk Fax then Yes FAXING 3 49 Polling reception Polling allows someone to fax a document to you without having to make the call or pay for it There are two kinds of polling e Regular polling Your machine retrieves a document from a remote fax machine e F Code polling Your machine retrieves a document stored in a F code boxes on the remote fax machine To do this you must be communicating with another F code compliant machine For more information on
122. are Polling Password K112233 _ CEES 5 Press Enter to return to the standby display 6 Specify the destination and begin polling The numeric keys address book and group dialing can be used 10 38 SPECIAL FEATURES Viewing the page counters You can check the total number of pages printed on your machine If duplex print ing is used each side of the document will count as one print Meaning a two sided document counts as 2 prints Print Total Shows the total number of copies fax receptions lists and PC printouts made Shows the total number of copies printed Fax List Shows the total number of fax receptions and internet fax recep tions and lists printed PC Print Shows the total number of printouts Checking the number of printed pages You can check the total number of pages printed and scanned on your machine Press Setting Counter 2 Select Print Total or Scan Total Counter select item to edit Print Total 00015924 Scan Total Q0012368 SPECIAL FEATURES 10 39 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O 3 The number of pages used for each function will be displayed Print Total Copy QO003715 Fax List 00002972 PL Print 000UGE When Print Total is selected 00004 75 00003219 PC Scan OO004274 When Print Total is selected 4 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 10 40 SPECIAL FEATURES Chapter Restricting use of the machine Sony Oa O aier
123. are scanning you may add up to 10 network files or up to 10 MB files worth of files to the job To attach a file Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press Others 4 Press Attachment Scan Functions Select item to edit Program 1002 Letter OFF DuplexScanl Batch Scanl FileFormat Ponpa BE achnens Address e mai Mai NOTE You can assign Attachment to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 5 After browsing all accessible networks will be displayed Network Navigation select attachment file s and press Enter sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 100 Back RE DOM_WORKGROUP Ra DOM_WORKGROUP2 RE DOM WORKGROUPS f DOM_WORKGROUP4 RE DOM WORKGROUPS 6 Select the network that contains your desired file To scroll use Page Up and Page Down NOTE The file should be under a shared folder that meets the following requirements e The folder should be in the same segment with your machine e The shared folder name should contain 12 or characters less e The link to the folder should contain 100 characters or less in length e The link to the file should be 128 characters or less in length 5 64 SCANNING 7 Search through the network folders until you find the folder in which the your desired file is File abl ed Select ariec mem ae eTa press Enter Jep z Memory 100 Root fl Back EA DOM_WORKGROUP L starr popowe e To go up one
124. at R ose Use this key to toggle the monochrome and color scan ai p 5 56 mode DuplexScan Scan Use this to scan a two sided document CS ee al a Ka p 5 61 Batch Scan Use this to select the scanned pages saved as one file p 5 59 or individual File Format Use this to select the file format for the scanned docu p 5 60 ment Mail Address Use this when entering e mail addresses manually v J Attachment Enables additional files attached to the scanned docu v v v p5 64 ment and send Enables to add a file name to the scanned document Address Book Use this to specify the destination by the address book V p 2 12 number e mail Subject Enables to edit a subject line and a message attached v p 5 24 to e mail Mail History Displays the last 20 manually entered e mail v p 5 21 addresses Displays the last e mail address you sent to v p 5 22 v possible to setup 10 4 SPECIAL FEATURES Programming a soft key Press Setting Management Soft Key Management Select item to edit Prev 4 lof aD Next Energy Save Mode Auto Print Journal OFF 2 Select the standby mode soft Key select item to edit Functions Functions Functions 3 The machine shows the function currently assigned to the soft key Select the soft key you want to change Copy Functions select item to edit 1 Doc Type 2 Contrast d Bypass SPECIAL FEATURES 10 5 SPECIAL FEATURES
125. ate What error messages can mean The error messages on Check Message printouts can mean a variety of things Here is a brief summary Check condition of remote fax e Remote machine malfunctioned e No Handshake signals from remote fax e Wrong phone number reached Repeat transmission e Poor phone line conditions e No Handshake signals from remote fax e Document misfeed or miscount e Unable to reach remote machine after attempt ing specified number of redial tries Line is busy e Remote machine s line was busy e Remote machine s line didn t answer Check received documents e Remote confirmation signal not received from remote fax e Poor line conditions caused a poor image Specified attached file s was not found e Network setting is not set up e There is no connection to the network e The user name or password is not entered cor rectly e The folder is not shared e The folder link is not entered correctly Could not connect to the location Folder e Network setting is not set up correctly e There is no connection to the network e The user name or password is not entered cor rectly Could not connect to the location FTP e The folder is not shared or the folder is write protected e The folder link is not entered correctly Please confirm the size of attached file s e The attached files exceeds the limit Should be within 10MB Memory full e Remote fax s memory is full Dialing number is not set e
126. atible I 1 When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evenings To protect your product against power surges we recommend the use of a power protection device Surge arrestor The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including FAX machines to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges For instructions on programming this information into your FAX machine see Initial setup on pages 1 14 to 1 22 of this manual FCC Part 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital devices pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
127. ble fax e Up to 20 digits can be entered for sub addresses Numerals can be entered o If you enter an incorrect number press Clear to delete it and then enter the correct one 02 Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub address and select Enter Sub Address Back Enter 000111222333_ lt es ccs 7 Press Enter 8 Enter the box name 1 Press Box Name 2 Enter the box name e The name can contain up to 16 characters e For details on character entry see page 1 10 Box Name Entry Limit 1 16 Back lEnter Box Name Paris Office 3 Press Enter Q Perform settings for Password Rx Protect Auto Print OverWrite Erase Tx Doc and I D Code as necessary 10 26 SPECIAL FEATURES O Entering an ITU T password 1 Press Password 2 Enter the password using the numeric keys then press Enter e Up to 20 digits can be entered for passwords Numerals and can be entered Bulletin Box lf a password is required enter the password and select Enter Password Back W Enter 123456 39_ CEDE O Setting protected reception 1 Press Rx Protect e When protected reception has been set to ON a document cannot be received into this bulletin box 2 Select either ON or OFF then press Enter e If ON has been selected for this setting Auto Print and OverWrite settings are set to OFF and cannot be set Bulletin Box Select ON OFF and
128. ble batch scanning Check Mail Check for new e mail documents that have arrived e mail Subject Add a subject line and text message to your e mail transmission NOTE You can select the following functions when sending an Internet fax For details on the following functions see Advanced fax functions on page 3 23 e Broadcast transmission e Address book e Fax amp Copy e Group transmission e Security reception e TTI select e Cover page e Transmission report e Delayed transmission e Scan size 4 6 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS Adding a text message to your e mail When you send a document to an e mail address a fixed subject and text are entered automatically However you can manually enter an e mail subject line and text to the transmission Editing the subject line and text message Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others Prew or Next 4 Press e mail Subject Fax Functions Select item to edit OFF OFF OFF ON Opt tons Address Sub i ect Batch Scan VF i beFormat When All tab is selected NOTE You can assign e mail Subject to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 6 Press Subject e mai lSubject Qdd a subject line and message or select a template then press Enter Subject E mail Message Mail Test WHlThis is an E mail messaze WIF le enolate INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 4 7 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 6 Enter the subject
129. ck Junk Fax then Yes Network Settings List Lists the currently network settings To print this list press Setting List Network Settings then Yes REPORT amp Lists 13 3 REPORT amp LISTS WW Folder Shortcut List Lists each shortcut s identifier number the shortcut name and the link destination To print this list press Setting List Folder Shortcut then Yes FTP Shortcut List Lists each shortcut s identifier number the shortcut name and the link destination To print this list press Setting List FTP Shortcut then Yes Tx confirmation report Prints after document transmission 13 4 REPORT amp LISTS Activity journal Just as a checkbook records your daily financial transactions your machine keeps an activity journal which records the 100 most recent fax internet fax and scan to e mail transactions The activity journal lists the following information for each transaction e Assigned number starting each day at 001 fax only e Remote location called e Resolution mode fax only e Starting date and time e Duration in minutes and seconds fax only e Number of pages fax only e Department code fax only See page 11 13 e Result of the call If preceded by an asterisk this signifies an ECM com munication If preceded by a pound this signifies communication was via a highspeed V 34 modem e Any special operations For example
130. code is registered at shipment Department Management Security Reception Display Jobs in Queue Copy Protect PIN Mode Scan Lamp Sleep Mode You can limit who uses the machine for sending faxes and making copies by requiring input of a department code Also register the charge per 1 sheet of copy when you collect the copy charge You can use this function to receive and store the faxes in memory but not print them This function is useful when no one is in the office for example at night You can print them later The number of out of paper receptions and copies waiting to be printed is displayed Prohibits copying When pressed ON the display will not switch to the copy mode even if Copy is pressed Fax amp copy mode will not be possible When pressing Mode 1 or Mode 2 if required to enter the PIN personal iden tification number for making a long distance call the PIN will not appear in a journal error message printout or a transmit confirmation report You can specify the sleep period of the scanner lamp to prolong its life While scanner lamp is in the sleep mode it will take a few moments to light the scanner lamp completely to scan a document See Department manage ment on page 11 13 See Security receptioon on page 11 3 See If paper runs out during fax reception on page 3 17 See Checking the copy print queue on page 7 28 OFF Mode 1 Mode 2 Se
131. code to access the department management settings NOTE This feature will work only if you have activated the passcord protection See _ page 11 2 Press Setting Management Next Depart Management Protect 2 Use the numeric keys to enter the passcode and then press Enter Depart Management Enter the Passcode and select Enter Protect Passcode Back Enter L La J LS iee 3 Press ON to protect department management e Press OFF to cancel the function Depart Management Select ON OFF and press Enter Access to department management settings can be password protected 4 Press Enter to save the setting 5 Press Reset to return to the standby mode RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 21 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E Copy protection Limit the use of your machine to send receieve only meaning the copy mode cannot be used Press Setting Management Next Copy Protect Management Select item to edit Prev 2of 3b Nert Journal Line Up OFF Depart Management Security Reception KOPP Display Jobs in Queue Copy Protect 2 When the protect passcode is set use the numeric keys to enter the protect passcode and press Enter When it has not been set proceed to step 3 Management Enter the Passcode and select Enter Protect Passcode a La Je steer 3 Press ON to activate copy protection Management Select ON OFF a
132. contain some black areas To reduce this effect hold down the document to prevent its bound part from rising However do not press too strongly This may break the document glass and cause an injury GETTING STARTED 1 25 GETTING STARTED Paper handling Acceptable paper sizes 0 Paper cassette Paper type Quantity Plain paper Letter Legal Half letter y 500 sheets weight 20 24 lbs weight 20 lbs LI Bypass tray Paper type Quantity Plain paper Letter Legal Half letter y Executive 50 sheets weight 20 28 lbs A4 A5 A5 AG F4 weight 20 lbs Custom sizes sheet e Width 3 8 to 8 5 in 97 to 216 mm e Length 5 5 to 14 in 140 to 356 mm Envelopes DL 4 33 x 8 66 in 110 x 220 mm 1 envelope Com 10 4 125 x 9 5 in 105 x 241 mm Monarch 3 875 x 7 5 in 98 4 x 190 5 mm 1 3 94 x 5 83 in 100 x 148 mm 20 sheets 20 sheets e Custom sized paper can be used for PC printing only e Do not use envelopes with double flaps or pressure seals since these do not feed properly e If using a transparency OHP film be sure that the film does not have a paper backing and or leading strip If it does remove the paper backing and or strip before loading Only the film should go in film with paper backing or a leading strip should not be fed O Duplex printing The duplex printing unit is required in order to perform two sided printing Paper type Plain paper Letter Legal A4 F4 weig
133. ct Enter F Code Polling Password 112233_ CEED Q Press Enter to return to the display in step 5 e When performing a delayed transmission press Delayed Tx and proceed to step 6 of Delayed transmissions See page 10 15 10 Press Enter to complete the entry 1 Press Enter again to finish the registration To return to the standby mode press Reset 10 18 SPECIAL FEATURES Deleting a program one touch Press Setting Fax Settings Program One Touch Delate 2 Press the program one touch number you want to delete 3 When the confirmation message appears press Yes to delete e Press No to cancel the deletion Delete select the number to delete Press Enter to continue TT 2222 0 Would you like to delete 4 To delete another program one touch number repeat from step 2 Press Reset to return to the standby mode NOTE To print a list of program one touch numbers press Setting List Other lists Program One Touch then Yes SPECIAL FEATURES 10 19 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O How to use a program one touch Example When delayed transmission has been registered Set the document See page 1 25 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others 4 Press Program One Touch NOTE You can assign Program One Touch to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 5 Select the program one touch you want to execute Program One
134. ct desired option 4 Select the macro key you want to register Enter Edit select the number that you want to enter edit Enter 1i Not registered Not registered SPECIAL FEATURES 10 7 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O 5 Press Yes to enter or edit a macro key e If you want to cancel press No and go back to step 4 Enter Edit select the number that you want to enter aedit T Not registered Select Yes to enter edit a macro key After registering the process select Start to complete the program 6 Perform the operation you want to register NOTE During the programming the machine beeps to indecate the machine isin _ the macro programming mode e You can register up to 60 steps When you exceed 60 steps Too many commands Would you like to enter message will appear If you want to register them press Yes If you want to abort press No e While the registering any mistakes in the operations and changes procedures are also registered e Normally the key to finish the macro registration is Start However when you select the operation including browsing the folders or files on network or seaching directory as below the key to execute the browsing operation or to execute searching directory is used to finish the registration The last key in the following steps becomes the key to finish the registration e SCAN e mail Search Advanced Condition entry Execu
135. ct list Scan Network Scanning See page 5 1 Your machine can seamlessly convert hardcopy monochrome and color documents into digital files for storage and distribution A feature unique to your machine is the ability to browse your internal network and seamlessly deliver documents directly into folder locations File Name and Format See page 4 13 5 6 5 60 Changing the file name and format when scanning has never been easier You can name each file prior to scanning using an intuitive QWERTY keypad making file retrieval easy You may also change the file format TIFF PDF JPEG in the scan menu insuring that each scan meets your archiving retrieval requirements I 16 General Network Printing See page 9 1 Youre not training for the Olympics so why run a marathon every time you need to make a copy The convenient network printing function is standard and allows you to decentralize printing from the copy room to your small workgroup Local Printing Scanning See page 9 1 Your machines small footprint is perfect for the small office home office an envi ronment that normally does not have a network set up That s why we offer direct printing and color scanning via the USB port bypassing the need for network con nectivity Paper Handling An additional 500 sheet cassette is available as an option bringing the total capac ity to 1 050 sheets This accommodates offices that utilize both letter and
136. ct name and select Enteri Entry Limit af al Edit window This displays the entered charac ters Mode selection keys Return key They change the type of Press this to insert a line characters that are be break while entering text in ing entered cover page or e mail subject 1 10 GETTING STARTED Number of entered charac ters Number of characters that can be entered This displays the number of characters that can be entered and the number of characters entered so far Cursor keys They move the character entry position Delete Press this to delete characters Entering alpha characters Select the characters to be entered from the QWERTY keypad Name Enter the contact name and select Enter Entry Limit vi L Upper and lower case characters Press Lower to enter the lower case letters Press Upper to enter the upper case letters Name Enter the contact name and select Enter Entry Limit af all Entering symbols and special characters Select Symbol to enter the symbol or special characters Enter the contact name and select Enter Entry Limit ff ol e The _ and com can be entered in the alpha entry display GETTING STARTED 1 11 GETTING STARTED The symbols that can be entered are as follows Entering numbers O Using the numeric keys Enter numbers by pressing the numeric keys O Using the
137. cu ments when the scan has been completed 4 When scanning has been completed set the next document if a book set the next page in place TA COPYING 5 Press Next Doc The next document will be scanned Set next document Set next doc Memory 100 6 Press Complete when all the documents have been scanned Copying using both document glass and ADF When the next document setting is activated you can make a copy using both the document glass and ADF Set the document in the ADF or on the document glass 2 Set Sort Copy Combine Copy NOTE Card Copy cannot be used for Combine copy 3 Press Start COPYING BA 4 When the document has been loaded into the ADF press Yes during scanning Memory 1002 5 When scanning has been completed set the next document NOTE When a document is loaded in the ADF remove the document from the docu _ ment glass COPYING 7 5 6 Press Next Doc The next document will be scanned gi 8 NOTE 7 6 COPYING e Press Complete to begin copying set next document 5 Joc H Ll Memory 100 Y 1 When the document is scanned using the document glass select the docu ment size 2 Press Enter Set next document Select document size Doc Size Back Enter When the document is scanned using the document glass press Complete to begin copying e When the document is scanned using the ADF copying will begin automati cally
138. cument glass is available only for MFX 2030 MFX 1480 model Size Max 8 5 x 14 in W x L 216 x 356 mm Quantity Document Plain paper and other type types of documents Items to avoid To prevent jams and damage to the automatic document feeder do not use the fol lowing Weight J o e Folded curled torn wrinkled or very thin pages e Documents with staples glue tape paper clips or still wet correction fluid e Sticky notes or documents with sticky notes attached e Cardboard newspaper or fabric e Pages with duplicating carbon on either side e Credit cards or any small thick items e OHP transparency film 1 24 GETTING STARTED Scanning area The scanned area is shown below Fax 0 1 in 2 5 mm Copy Scan 0 in 0 mm Fax 0 08 in 2 0 mm _ Scanned area Copy Scan 0 in 0 mm ___ Fax 8 2 in 208 mm Copy Scan 8 5 in 216 mm Loading documents in the ADF Insert the documents face up top edge first 2 Adjust the document guides to the document size Loading the document on the document glass T ZEH DSa j3 Make sure there is no documents in the ADF II I 2 Lift the platen cover 3 Face down the document and place it on the document glass The document should be aligned to the upper left corner 4 Gently close the platen cover IMPORTANT When copying a bound document such as a book the copied image may
139. cument in the ADF the side to be copied should be face up Copy quality is poor See Print quality problems on page 14 29 PC printing errors Suggested solutions Cannot print from your The USB cable is not connected properly When using as a local printer computer Check the cable connection Check that the network cable is connected properly When using as a net work printer Check that the network setting is made up properly When using as a net work printer The port setting is incorrect Check the printer port setting in your computer The applicable printer driver may not be installed properly Reinstall the printer driver Printing is too slow Computer may not have enough memory Install more RAM in your computer The print job is large or complex The machine takes a lot of times when printing a large print jobs Please wait until the machine finishes the job Print quality is poor See Print quality problems on page 14 29 The printing option does not Some software applications will overwrite the option set on the printer property page effect for the printouts Choose your printing options from the application Tn order to use your machine as a local or network printer you should have the applicable print driver installed from CD supplied with your machine 14 28 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Local Scanner errors Suggested solutions Cannot scan a document e The TWAIN drive
140. d Edit SCANNING 5 35 SCANNING oO 5 Select an empty key Add Edit Select a number to enter edit Prev 4 tof 4b Next EP EP ali ali 6 Press Shortcut Name 101 Select the line item vou want to edit Press Enter to continue Shortcut Name UserName Password 7 Enter a shortcut name then press Enter The name can contain up to 24 characters If you do not register a shortcut name the folder link will be displayed on the shortcut key When the link is too long to be displayed on the key it will be omitted at the center with and only the beginning and ending of the link will be displayed 5 36 SCANNING 8 Press Link The Network Navigation screen will be displayed al 1 Select the line item you want to edit Press Enter to continue Shortcut Name Temp UserName Password Q All accessible networks will be displayed To scroll use the Page Up and Page Down Network Navigation Select a network location Sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 100 Ra DOM WORKGROUP Ra DOM WORKGROUP RE DOM_WORKGROUPS RE DOM_WORKGROUP4 RE DOM_WORKGROUPS NOTE If you want to directly specify a folder using the QWERTY keypad press Key pad Then enter a link and press Enter 10 Search through the network folders until you find the specific folder you wish to register to and press Enter Network Navigation Select folder destination Sep 26
141. d the attuched document b Please let us Know if vou have any question about this document Wl We are looking forward to hearing from vou 147 146 ic 12 Press Enter 13 Select a destination s 14 Press Start Using a registered template You can select a registered template to simplify the entry process You can register up to ten templates NOTE The template should be registered in advance See the Network Guide for instruction Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail 4 Press Others 5 Press e mail Subject 6 Press Template e mai lSubject Add a subject line and message or select a template then press Enter Subject Auto Subject Mail Text duto Subject Text Template 5 26 SCANNING 7 Select the desired template If the desired template is not shown on the display press Page Up or Page Down to go to the next page e mai lSubject Select a template and press Enter Template Back enter l uto Subject Text ira Aer Auto Subject A U1 News Release of U2 Notification J 03 Cofidential Page U4 Invitation 8 Press Enter O If you want to edit the subject or the text message select either Subject or Mail Text and edit it Refer steps 6 to 12 on pages 5 24 to 5 26 for instructions 10 Select a destination s 1 Press Start Changing the default text message Press Setting on the cont
142. da check your in box materials for the number to call 2 During the warranty period the Customer must notify Muratec by telephone of any defective product material and or workmanship 3 Transportation including prepayment of freight and insurance charges of the product to and from an authorized service center designated by Muratec is the responsibility of the Customer 4 If Muratec provides maintenance or responds to a call which is outside the scope of this warranty such maintenance shall be billed to the Customer at Muratec s then current rates for maintenance and parts and shall be due and payable in full upon receipt of invoice Exclusions 1 This warranty shall not cover a product with missing or altered original identifi cation marks 2 This warranty applies only to products that the purchaser has properly installed adjusted and operated in accordance with the instructions set forth in or pro vided with product literature This warranty does not apply to any product which has been subjected to tampering alteration misuse abuse neglect improper installation or transportation damage Nor does it apply to costs for any service requested for demonstration or to confirm proper operation of this product 3 The warranty shall not apply to adjustments repairs or replacements neces sitated by any cause beyond the control of Muratec whether foreseeable or not including but not limited to any malfunction defects or fai
143. dd a subject line and message or select a template then press Enter Back I Enter Subject E mail Message Mail Text MThis is an E mail message WIF le Template Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 4 9 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 6 Select the desired template If the desired template is not shown on the display press Page Up or Page Down to go to the next page e mai lSubject Select a template and press Enter of 2 03 Cofidential Page U4 Invitation 7 Press Enter 8 Ifyou want to edit the subject or the text message select either Subject or Mail Text and edit it Refer steps 6 to 11 on page 4 8 for instructions O Specify the destination s 10 Press Start Changing the default text message 4 10 You can change the default template setting for the subject line and text message See Mail Settings on page 12 9 For details see Adding a text message to your e mail on page 4 7 5 24 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS Batch scanning When you select OFF each page in the transmission will be sent as an individual file each page will also be a seperate transmission The default setting is ON NOTE You can change the default setting for batch scan See Mail Settings on page 12 9 Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2
144. documents mixed with fax and e mail for broadcast transmissions will have different commands for fax and e mail respectively In this case you can only cancel one of the commands OS D Press Fax Cancel Job Confirm Delayed Commands Review Commands Delayed Commands History 2 Select the command you want to cancel Delayed Commands select the location to cancel the transmission Prev 4 tot 2 Next Communicating 001 05 02 39pm BrdCast Delayed Commands 002 05 04 30pm BrdCast 3 When the broadcast command you have selected is in progress you can cancel the destinations individually Go to the next step without pressing Yes Otherwise go to the step 6 6 4 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS 4 To review or cancel the individual destinations within this broadcast press Detail Delayed Commands Select the location to cancel the transmission Communicating 007 05 02 39pm BrdCast Would you like to delete Details 0123456789 W001 Sam KeNew York Office ROO Mike M London Office H004 Beth We Chicaga Office B005 Chanz K Beijiing Offic Detail 5 Press the destination you want to cancel Delayed Commands Select the location to cancel the transmission In Progress 01729456 69 Reserved H001 Sam K New York Office Reserved 002 Mike M London Office Reserved W004 Beth W Chicaga Office Reserved H005 Chang K Beijing Office 6 Press Yes Delayed Commands S
145. dpi or 600 dpi scan resolution for color scanning Scanning at 600 dpi provides greater detail in scanned images but creates large files and uses more PC and machine based memory Color documents scanned at 600 dpi data may not appear correctly in your application software 1 Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press Resolution Scan Ready Seo 26 2005 02 15 m Memory 100 R Beso i f Gearch Index J Auto 4 Select the desired resolution Scan Ready Adiust the resolution and select Enter Resolution Horna Col 5 Press Enter NOTE When you are scanning monochrome documents the color resolutions are grayed out To scan a color document first toggle Color to ON and the color resolution setting will become available e You can change the default setting for Resolution See Accessing the default scan settings on page 12 7 5 2 SCANNING Contrast Adjusting the scan contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive lightness or darkness of the documents you are scanning NOTE This function is not available when scanning a color document Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press Contrast scan sigs solu oMear 6 2005 inter Memory 100 Address J a ewr 4 Press to left to lighten press to right to darken Scan Ready Adiust the contrast and select Enter Ci i SCANNING a
146. duct is transferred this warranty terminates This warranty does not apply to any prod uct in use for rental purposes This Muratec product is warranted against defects in material and workman ship for ninety 90 days commencing the date of original Customer purchase If the product is defective in material and or workmanship normal wear and tear excepted during the warranty period Muratec or its authorized representative will during Muratec s established service availability hours make necessary adjustments and repairs including at Muratec s option installation of replace ment parts Muratec s service availability hours are 8 30 am to 5 00 pm Central time Monday through Friday excluding Muratec recognized holidays Muratec will complete the necessary adjustments and repairs within a reasonable time period as dictated by the nature of the problem and by Muratec s service schedule Replacement parts may have been used and or reconditioned Parts that have been replaced will remain the property of Muratec This warranty is subject to the obli gations and exclusions set forth Obligations 1 This warranty will be honored only on presentation of the original dated autho rized Muratec bill of sale or Muratec dealer bill of sale or sales slip to an autho rized Muratec service representative or service center For the name of your authorized service center contact Muratec from the United States call 1 469 429 3350 from Cana
147. e PIN masking on page 11 7 ON OFF Start Time 10 00 pm Reset Time 06 00 am 1 MACHINE SETTINGS MACHINE SETTINGS 12 13 Paper settings You can customize the paper settings to match your needs Accessing the paper settings Press Setting Paper Settings 2 Set or change the selected items Paper Settings select item to edit Letter Letter Print Cassi Rx Page For details on each setting refer to the following table 3 When you are finished press Reset to return to the standby mode The underlined settings are the factory defaults Cassette XX You can register the size of paper used in the cassette Operation can be simpli See Setting the paper Paper fied by registering the paper size frequently used when using the cassette size on page 1 30 Bypass Tray You can register the type or size of paper used in the bypass tray See Setting the paper Paper Operation can be simplified by registering the paper size frequently used when size on page 1 30 using the bypass tray Select Print You can set the cassette using range for cassette 1 cassette 2 and bypass tray Cassette respectively Not Use _ This cassette is not used for receiving faxes and copying You can use it for PC printing and separate reception page Fax Use this cassette when receiving faxes or internet faxes and print ing a list Copy Use this cassette when copying Fax amp Copy Use
148. e Down Specified destinations Switching key for This displays the selected destinations The displayed order from the top is as fol To Ce Bec lows Press this key to 1 manually entered e mail address switch the sending 2 e mail address To Cc Bcc specified by address book method from To Cc 3 manually entered fax number Bec To 4 fax number specified by address book 3 26 FAXING Specify the destinations for the broadcast transmission and press Location Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Select Location to confirm delete recipient To jwhite aol com eoa a Search orma ljg 4 O01 Sam New York Office i O01 Sam New York Office w D02 MikerLondan Office Redial E002 Mike London Office N M003 Carl Paris Office History J 2 The selected destinations will be displayed Location Confirm the locations and select Enter or press Start to begin the arnsmiss ior I RAOO MikesLondon Office Y Z 2 c 3 Follow the steps below to delete the selected destinations e You can also change the sending method To Cc and Bcc for e mail addresses See Location display on page 3 26 1 Select the destination you want to delete You can select multiple destinations 2 Press Delete to delete the selected destination Location Confirm the locations and select Enter 001 Sam New York Office EIO04 Beth Chicago Office 0123456709 w 00A Mi
149. e to close the window Search Results Select a contact s and press Enter Hit 0019 7 New Search AJ bA abcdef muratec com P tA abbedd muratec com 10 If your search yields too many contacts select Narrow List to futher narrow your search Refer to steps 5 to 8 how to search If you want to start a new search press New Search and search again Refer to steps 5 to 8 how to search 12 Continue searching until you find your desired contact s If you press Back on the Advanced Search screen you will return to the Search Results screen e Press Cancel to return to the standby screen 13 Select the desired destination s NOTE If you cannot find your contact s please confirm that the search criteria was entered correctly If this does not solve the problem ask your network adminis trator Registering a destination from the search results screen If you locate a contact on an LDAP server and wish to register them into your machine side address book please follow these steps Execute either a simple search or advanced search Search Results Select a contact s and press Enter Hit 0079 erroi flew Search AJ EJ abedef muratec com F abbcdd muratec com 2xcyvabemuratec com a tA absdfg muratec com e mai EA 1294d5ab muratec com SCANNING 5 19 SCANNING a 2 Once the Search Results screen appears select the amp J next to the contact you
150. e control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press Others 4 Press Scan Size Scan Functions select item to edit Program 1002 Auto OFF Duplexscan batch Scan FileFormat dddress e mail Mai NOTE You can assign Scan Size to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 5 Select the desired scan size Scan Functions Select the scanning size and press Enter Scan Size Bask ER 6 Press Enter SCANNING 5 5 SCANNING oO Entering the file name 5 6 You can add a file name to the document prior to scanning The name can contain up to 20 characters You can also register up to 10 file names in advance allowing for quick access If you do not enter a file name prior to scanning the scanned date and time will be used as the file name For example if the document is scanned on 26 September 2005 on 2 15 p m 30 second the file will be named 20050926141530 Also if the name you use for the file already exists the scan date and time will be added to the end of the file name to give it differentation Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 Press File Name If you have chosen Folder or FTP File Name is located on the default screen If you have chosen e mail press Others to locate File Name Scan Functions Scan Ready Select item to edit 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 100 Sep T Resolution Browse Add Edit 200dp iff Program 10 Let
151. e document can be bound on the left side right side or top Right or left binding Document Left binding Right binding e Select these when binding on the right or left side of the copy Top binding Top binding Document e Select this when binding on the top side of the copy 7 18 COPYING One sided copying of a duplex document 2 1 This mode allows you to convert two sided originals into one sided documents 1 Scan the front side 2 Turn over the document 3 The scanned data temporarily and scan the backside saved in the memory will be sorted and printed ASS YP gt NOTE When the power fails due to such as blackout during one sided copying of duplex document see as follows e While sorting the scanned data The scanned data temporarily saved will not be saved in memory e When sorting the scanned data is completed The scanned data temporarily saved will be saved in memory Set the front side of the duplex document in the ADF 2 Press COPY to display the Copy standby mode 3 Press Others DuplexCopy If the duplex printing unit is not installed press DuplexScan NOTE You can assign DuplexCopy or DuplexScan to the soft key See Soft keys on pages 10 2 to 10 6 4 Press 2 gt 1 sided If the duplex printing unit is not installed press ON Copy Functions select the duplex copy method and press Enter Duplex Cony Method OFF sided J gt as j ded
152. e front of the cassette 1 28 GETTING STARTED Loading paper into the bypass tray When you need to use a paper size that is not currently loaded in the paper cas sette or when you want to print on an envelope transparency film or custom sized paper use the bypass tray NOTE Only use print media specified under Acceptable paper sizes on page 1 26 to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Open the bypass tray on the right side of your machine Unfold the paper sup port extension 2 To set the paper 1 raise the flapper release lever 2 load paper until it comes to a stop 3 1 Adjust the paper guides to fit the paper 2 then lower the flapper release lever GETTING STARTED 1 29 GETTING STARTED 4 After loading paper into the bypass tray you need to set the correct paper size See Setting the paper size below NOTE You can also set the paper size for bypass tray by pressing Bypass in the Copy standby mode Setting the paper size Default setting 1st cassette Letter 2nd cassette option Letter Bypass Tray Letter After loading paper into the paper cassette bypass tray you need to set the correct paper size on the control panel by using the following procedure Press Setting 2 Press Paper Settings sett ings select item to edit Address Paper Store Doc Book eso Jf Grou Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings User LU Setting t
153. e machine is left idle for a user determined amount of time the machine will automatically enter energy save mode 80 sheet ADF While it s true most fax copy and scan jobs contain less than 10 pages you may have the occasional need to perform larger jobs With the standard 80 sheet ADF large jobs do not have to be broken up thus increasing efficiency I 13 Fax Dual Line Option High volume fax users will appreciate the ability to send and receive fax documents at the same time greatly increasing office efficiency Security Reception See page 11 3 Security reception allows you to receive documents into password protected storage boxes This insures that documents are only viewed by authorized personnel Batch Transmission See page 3 35 Scan documents into batch transmission storage boxes and schedule the trans mission time for off peak hours both reducing operating costs and allowing the machine to be available during peak business hours Fax Forwarding Skipping town Simply turn on the fax forwarding feature and have all inbound documents routed to a remote fax number See page 3 51 Using a web browser you can set up an advanced forwarding system See page 5 17 of the Network guide Transmission Confirmation Report See page 13 8 Automatically generate a transmission confirmation report to confirm whether or not your fax document reached the remote machine successfully I 14
154. e number 0 e Enter the e mail address manually See page 4 2 _or e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 _or e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 If you specify the destination using the address book the transmission will begin If you specify it by another method proceed to step 6 Press Start FAXING 3 31 Cover page Your machine can store a cover page and send it prior to each outgoing fax and Internet fax The default setting is OFF MESSAGE RECEIVER Destination s name Destination s fax number Destination s e mail address SENDER Your name Your fax number Your e mail address MESSAGE Enter your message When you directly enter the destination s fax number and or e mail address only the fax number or e mail address will be printed When you specify the destina tion from the address book the name fax number and e mail address registered in the address book will be printed Turning the cover page on 1 2 3 4 NOTE 3 32 FAXING Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode Press Others Press Cover Page e ON and OFF toggle every time you press Cover Page Press Enter Now the cover page feature is working but your message line is blank To enter a message see Entering the cover page message on the next page
155. editing an address book number from page 2 4 015 select the address book item to enter edit Enter 5 Press Enter Selecting a destination from the Address Book SCANNING oO You can register 300 frequently used e mail and fax numbers in advance Once the numbers addresses are registered they will be displayed on the display for instant recall NOTE The e mail destination or the group information should be registered in advance For more information see chapter 2 Resitering destinations in Address Book on pages 2 4 to 2 11 NOTE If you select a destination from the default mode screen the machine will automatically start scanning If you want to select multiple destinations press Broadcast prior to selecting destinations Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail 4 Select the desired destination s from the display Scan Ready Select Location to confirm delete recipi To E001 Sam kK New York Office 5 em 7 004 Beth W Chicago Office E005 Chang K Beijing Offic SCANNING 5 11 5 Ifthe registered destination is not shown on the display press Page Up or Page Down to toggle through the directory Go to the next section to learn how to use these functions Using Index If you have numerous contacts registered in your address book you may find the Index a useful tool in finding them Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control
156. eeccesesseeecceesssssescecessseeeeeeseeseeeeceseeeaes 7 11 OGM TE A E A A E A N 7 12 PRU EC BORE ssania rinine ena EEE E EAEE EE Ra 7 13 OMT T E A TE A INE E EAN E estan 7 14 Duplo CO ea A E A OEA E AEA T A 7 16 C O aA E E ENE E E E 7 25 Specifying the document size to CODY xicaceuadinnecaceonnccacsavesaccdunauncsbuncaadacvonavencaauaseesinaauaavons 1 27 Checking the copy print queue eesessesssserersssrrerssssrrerssssererssssreeresssrreeeesesrreesssereeessssreeesse 7 28 Chapter 8 abl AX NOG Woe aiseeun cee cstesnsiesesicussasvin E EET 8 1 Installing the drIy r ieee actzetnssricncrccetvowcenstoo attoaetierie sue velvet sscuneu ase atnandee ora outiocvautecounsyasceaonieteaetaoea 8 2 BN CA A a D e o EE E aa cece sauna amen cata E E E E E E OS 8 3 Chapter 9 PDE r A 9 1 Installing the driver sth cies sassacance ca arauieetumnee nied ia ceanondueartaawsaesestondea cosctnoceacueastcenaatoeasccsleacanasenonaees 9 2 Printing a document from the PC ccc sincsasctnsiadeisvansnetsndvaacsussineeasetadsndavvvineionavensectsuacsebodinends 9 3 Chapter 10 Special leal COS a cencsisnecscoatesscoosceacscnscccecssstsncostaeeisccsvsduasssuaccuconssuavessrasdssscouscescessscsavcsaspeueasteaness 10 1 OM KC YS r E E E AE TAE A E EES 10 2 SO Key UNCTIO S enra aeaa aaRS R aE ia A AEO rR 10 2 FProorammine asil lt 2a eae ee i T OA 10 5 ES CON E AA A E E A A E TE E E EN 10 7 Registering or editing a Macro sessssessssseeressssrersssssreressssrerresssreeeesssereee
157. eeceeeeseeeeeeeeens 14 16 Check Message printouts seeesseesseessesserresssrrersssssreressssrereessreeeesserreessseerreeesssreeese 14 23 Paor GOMES eA E E A 14 24 Alene eO eaa EA E 14 26 ea EOS A EEE E E ETTE E E E E E A ATE AEE E 14 26 Cn 2 O ae E eee ee 14 27 CODY EOS a E E E E O 14 28 POOPING A CITO seene AS 14 28 Local Scanner errors uesssessesssssseressssrreressrrerreserrreessseretessssteeeessrteetesserteesssssrreesssereee 14 29 Print quality problems sseeseessesseressssrerrssssreeresssrrresssssreressssrereessreeressereeesssserreessssreeeee 14 30 If you cannot solve the problem eeesessseessrrssssserrsssserersssssrresssssreresssrreeeessereeeesserreesssee 14 32 Appendix INC seririnni nnn r EEE EE AI 1 PS CCU OBS PA E E E A E AI 2 CB e R E E E EA E A E ATE AI 2 TAX a stccsse tones ve E A A E E A AE T E AI 3 CO casts aa erie cantare ss cs see oe earns dtc napus E NE Al 8 PEE sucouesstosacionsaia E gauauaseqss usted saecaucusbuensusteacssaadaiect E Al 3 21102 eee eee nee re Oe en ee E me E Al 4 Consumable emg or arcciratecextatsouiiassaacsecalvseuataicasosiectoatia yoceanandeseauanecesdasesiontaacebectueanaaneaeaenaeura Al 4 Regulatory information Customer information United States of America This equipment complies with Part 68 of FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US DKUF
158. eens 12 8 MUTES CAINS A E tadetorasade cian unastionteronateenoutapegunasinotaasoasbontnonatectotacniseoestactavseaaton 12 9 Accessing the mail settings sc csorcsiaccdernaccsadictedandevonecaioteviaastndiced melo iasaesntaienieiemeieanaianis 12 9 Management Setting cccccccsssssssscccccccccessssssseeeeeceeeeeesssssaeeeesccceeeessesaeeeeecececesseeeeeeeees 12 11 Accessing the management SettingS cccssccccssssssccssssssccesssssccesssesscessseescesseeeeeens 12 11 PIG BCG E T A EEE EEE E T T E A A E 12 14 Accessing the paper settings ssesseresessseesssssrerrssssrerrsserrrereserrreessserreesssssreresssrrereesseees 12 14 Chapter 13 Report amp List oe ssdsessceoscentosccesceessnncvoscevsnvesserssevessacestcecacacssasainevsapeenassvsssapesvesuesdsessesievencaassesvescaees 13 1 Lists and journal reports sasucepecccasvasuoecscnagaenonegtaaschancananammucesereenenctecreanstnenceeestaamenaamenects 13 2 Activity journalen naaa ena E aN Ea AEE AN ONEAN KEE 13 5 Setting the activity journal eeseeesseseeesssrerrssssreresssrreessssreessssereresssrreeressereeeesserrreesssens 13 5 Printing the activity journal manually seeseeeeeeeesseessesseressssrerresssrreeessssreeessssrreessssreeeesse 13 6 Setting the order on the activity journal sseeseessesssersssssereessssreresssrrerresserreersserrreessssns 13 7 Transmission confirmation TCPOED sicciscccsnsscacsdesnieteadonstenidneudsenniacsevoranualsacsebacnactaametaandaesent 13 8 Setting the
159. elect item to edit Add Edit 3 Select the shortcut you want to edit Add Edit Select a number to enter edit Prev 4 tof 4b Next BIT Temp 02 Document O3 Estimate 04 5 STAFF O8 Bi lls 4 Edit the desired field 01 Temp Select the line item you want to edit Press Enter to continue Enter shortcut Name Temp Link STAFFS Temp UserName MURATEC 5 After editing press Enter 6 To return to the standby mode press Reset 5 40 SCANNING Deleting a folder shortcut Press Setting 2 Press Scanner Settings Folder Shortcut Delete Folder Shortcut Select item to edit Add Edit Delete 3 Select the shortcut you want to delete Delete Select a number to delete Select a number to delete B01 Temp Would you like to delete 5 To return to the standby mode press Reset SCANNING 5 41 SCANNING a Scan to FTP Scanning documents to an FTP server You can easily scan a document s to an FTP server Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press FTP Select Scan Destination Sep 6 2005 02 15pm Memory 1003 4 Adjust the scan settings or set any advanced functions For more information about those functions see Before scanning on pages 5 2 to 5 8 and Advanced functions on pages 5 56 to 5 66 5 Press Host Memory 100 Add Edit OFF AS 5 42 SCANNING 6 Press Link Enter the host infomati
160. elect the location to cancel the transmission Reserved 001 Sam KNew York Office Would you like to delete If you want to cancel a different destination go back to step 5 If you want to go back to reviewing or canceling another command press Enter To stop reviewing or canceling commands press Reset REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS 6 5 V a Z lt O Oo Z 5 O Z d S 62 O amp Z z S as Printing a delayed command list Your machine can print a command list which shows the following e The command number the batch transmission box number and the internet fax command number e The phone number the e mail address and the address book number of the speci fied destination e The start time this appears in the DD HH MM format e The function specified for the command ex Broadcast Batch transmission will be printed in Note To print a delayed command list press Setting List Journal List Command List then Yes Printing a stored document Your machine can print out documents stored for a delayed transmission Press Setting 2 Press Store Doc Settings 3 Press Print Store Doc Settings Select item to edit Press Enter to continue 4 Press Command Doc Print select item to edit Doc Doc R Doc Doc Command Doc 6 6 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS 5 Press the command document you want to print Command D
161. elines e Clean your machine regularly Dust and dirt especially around the fax machine s air vents can shorten your machine s life e Always unplug the machine before you clean it e Never spray any cleaner directly onto your machine The drifting spray could damage the components inside e Never try to clean sealed areas inside your machine They are sealed for both your safety and the safety of your machine e When cleaning the machine s exterior use a mild cleaning solution sprayed onto a lint free cloth e In areas you cannot reach with a swab always use dry dust free compressed air to gently blow away dust and other material Cleaning the scanning area F 560 F 520 model Wipe the ADF glass with a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water ADF glass MFX 2030 MFX 1430 model Wipe the document glass ADF glass and document pad with a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water 2 Then wipe it with a clean soft dry lint free cloth until it is clean and dry Document pad ADF glass Document glass 14 2 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Cleaning the ADF rollers If you are having document feeding issues try this procedure Turn off the power and disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Open the ADF cover 3 Use a cloth moistened with a rubber roller cleaner to clean the face of the roll ers Rotate the rollers by hand to clean the enti
162. elorto SEG NC casscangsciadeeusncsasmanentasnaat EOE EERE AEA A Ea 4 2 Sende an enaa A vonueenseeinne tiemnes unetemnecnansent 4 2 Entering an e mail address using the QWERTY keypad cccccessscccceesssseeeeessseees 4 2 By Cz VAM ATE E E N T E EEE EE A A sng A TEE 4 3 Mail BLES GO eeresninminnsonen a a EEEE EEEE aacsnonent 4 4 Reviewing or canceling commands essssssrrsssssreessssreressssrereesserreresssrrressssreeessssrereessrreeeesee 4 6 Advanced mail functionSs esseeessseessssessssesessseesssseeesssereesseresssereresereseseressseresssseessssresssseess 4 6 Adding a text message to your e mail ssessesssssresssrressrerrssrerrssreesssrerssereesserresserressereesee 4 7 Pa CONN E E EE A 4 11 Checking 10r new e 112 ee nn est ee a N Ae ee ne 4 12 Specifying the attachment file format ccccccccsssscccccesssssseccecessseeecceeessseesscesenaes 4 13 Chapter 5 COMME i itrenaitinnsteandsivsnuss icin nse 5 1 Before scanning cccccccccsssssccccessesseeecccessssscecceeessseeeeceseessseececessnseeeeceeeesseeesceeeessaeeceeseeaaeeeees 5 2 KONON ae E A suas seen saep aes 5 2 Oaa o EIES A A N E E O nein E E 5 3 Document y PE sassis roren nnna a aN ANE ETENEE AE EEEE 5 4 S ATE 0 OE A ET E A E N AA E AA 5 5 Entering the file NaAMe eeeeeeesssesseesssssrerrsssrrerrrssrrrerssssrreessssrereesssrrereessrreeessserreesesereeeesssees 5 6 SELO oa I EE EE TE I N E E E E E E E A E E 5 9 Sending a document by e mail
163. ensactaenscessacaseypecosetaieerseasenenoveseaciass 3 35 Specifying the document scanning SIZE cccceeseseessssseeeeeeeeees 3 41 Polline tans mission eaire n ee ene ant OEN 3 42 Overseas transmission sssesesessessseressseresseresssereesseresserersseressseees 3 43 Using an alternative telephone network service provider Dial prefix 3 44 Prock R Ia E E E OE A cases 3 46 Poll nr PCC On aerer E S 3 50 TA TOW Ve PONG sear E A E EATS 3 51 G parator Pi sevinrianr ATEA 3 57 Before sending Document handling Before you begin please review the acceptable document sizes and proper setting methods on pages 1 24 to 1 25 Scanning resolution e Normal is suitable for most text documents and simple drawings e Fine is ideal for maps moderately complicated drawings floorplans or handwrit ten documents e Superfine S Fine on the display reproduces the detail of extremely compli cated drawings or line art e Photo Photo on the display captures shades in photos and drawings To change the scanning resolution Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Resolution 3 Select one of the resolution types Fay Ready Fax Ready Mode Adjust the resolution and select Enter Resolution Back Enter o E Fhoto e 4 Press Enter NOTE You can change the default setting for Resolution See Accessing the default _ settings on page 12 4 3 2 FAXING Scanning contras
164. ently remove the document from the ADF If you cannot remove it turn the release knob to remove the jammed document LSE ca 3 Close the ADF cover making sure both sides are snapped down securely NOTE To prevent document jam use the document glass for wrinkled or torn docu ments Jammed in feed area Open the platen cover Open the ADF cover and turn the release knob to remove the jammed document s e s if a i KJ ET S SI 2 Close the platen cover and the ADF cover NOTE To prevent document jam use the document glass for wrinkled or torn docu ments MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 11 g MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Aas Jammed in exit area Open the platen cover Gently pull the jammed document If you cannot it open the ADF cover and turn the release knob to remove the jammed document 2 Close the platen cover and the ADF cover NOTE To prevent document jam use the document glass for wrinkled or torn docu ments 14 12 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Paper jams If a paper jam occurs the following display will appear Open ist Side Cover Please Remove Paper Follow these procedures to clear the paper jam If a paper jam occurs during fax reception the machine will store the received document into memory and print them automatically once the paper jam
165. ents can shorten the time required to adjust settings Sort Sort will be defaulted to Sort ON and OFF toggle every ON OFF time you press Sort MACHINE SETTINGS 12 3 1 MACHINE SETTINGS Fax settings You can customize the fax settings to match your needs This section describes Default Settings and Other Settings For details on other items see below e Program One Touch See page 10 14 e Fax Forward See page 3 51 e Cover Page See page 3 32 e Batch Tx Box See page 3 35 e F Code Box See page 10 21 Accessing the default fax settings Press Setting Fax Settings 2 Press Default Settings Fax Settings select item to edit Enter Batch Tx Other 3 Set or change the selected items Default Settings select item to edit Enter Normal Normal ON ON OFF OFF OFF For details on each setting refer to the following table 4 When you are finished press Reset to return to the standby mode 12 4 MACHINE SETTINGS The underlined settings are factory defaults Resolution This sets the default setting for the resolution of the document to be scanned By setting it to a level suitable for the most commonly sent document type you can reduce the time and effort required when making changes Contrast This sets the default setting for the contrast of the document to be scanned By setting Lightest it to a level suitable for the most commonly sent document type
166. eption box documents received in the bulletin boxes and documents stored in the bulletin boxes If documents have been received into F code boxes the F code reception informa tion will be printed out Use this information to locate and print the document Press Setting Store Doc Settings Print 2 Press F Code Doc Print select item to edit Doc Doc R Doc Doc Doc 3 Select the F code box that contains the document F Code Doc Select document and press Enter Prev lof ap Next Enter U2 Paris Office 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the I D code 4 digits if it has been set If an I D code has not been set proceed to step 5 F Code Doc Enter D Code SPECIAL FEATURES 10 33 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O 5 Select the applicable file number For security box reception the procedure will end after step 5 Select All stored documents to print out every document stored in this F code box Prev lof 6m Next O1 Already stored 6 Press Yes Any stored or received document will be printed e Documents in the security reception box will be removed from memory after they have been printed e Documents received or stored in bulletin boxes will not be deleted after they are printed TiAlready stored ould you like to print 10 34 SPECIAL FEATURES Deleting stored documents Press Setting Store Doc Settings Delete Bulletin Box Doc Dele
167. essssseresssererrrssrreerssssreeessssrereesssrreresssrreerssssrreesssesereeesssees 6 6 View or print the results of a fax transaction eeesseesessssersssssseerssssrereessrreeresserrressseereees 6 8 Chapter 7 COD MING po E A E E A O 7 1 Poro E p E AA E T R 7 2 Document and paper handling t diesacraaseiocresainatuadonacnaopedsensteartubeteraenadedsnaswiaspienteigasotaseets 7 2 Memory overflow message ccccccccccsessscccccssssseecceecssseeseeeeesssseeeccssesaeeceeeseseeeeeeesenees 1 2 Making Copies aris sg ecreaindocucancrsttesntiaestetacenteaen ences duasay doonde adesacca tunes ebarostaedunadededontocntenesatemone 7 3 IV A CONICS EETA EE NET EE E AE E AE T 7 3 Setting the next document wiicaicicsectncdacponcinenresnsetmntandnioves spubadaoathosdadandetontansntootitnudacsenimentes 7 3 Copying using both document glass and ADF cce cc cccccccccssseccessssceeesssseeeesssesseessaes 7 5 Copy recor AAO I seeno E E 7 7 TSC CO yO SS Seca A E EAE O P E E E E E E E N AEE EET 71 8 Docin CTE G06 ccsasatteasceveantacnansegasoureectscnsnaccseaws case cones aucuecadtentetauaatevuebonsaisananaeeanootencaeuies 7 8 905 a1 E E E E AS 7 9 Numnper of CONC acicrcsticcieenanas oxen ast usooeaweavedscteiounautisedtoentacteaneuiuesenadeoiaienaneseuoemanenmnoeneesauutons 7 9 Advanced copy TUL HOS yg ccsenarqsncanetscen aesmeotentevscaaenatbonnbseienaoecnnraraasaamnsaoonceapuet aden aens 7 10 Selecting the Paper SIZC ccccesccccccesssssecccccesssse
168. et ing the existing information in each step NOTE To print a list of batch boxes press Setting List Other Lists Batch Tx Box then Yes See page 13 3 Storing a document for batch transmission Your machine can store up to 40 documents each document can include one page or many pages Once the batch documents are transmitted they are automatically erased from the batch box NOTE During transmission a batch number for each document in the specified batch transmission box will be displayed We recommend you should make a record of these batch numbers which will control the documents and are required for reviewing and deleting documents To store a document in a batch box for batch transmission Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others 4 Press Batch Tx NOTE You can assign Batch Tx to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 5 Select the batch transmission box Batch Transmission select the box that will store the document s and press Enter FAXING 3 37 6 Press Yes Batch Transmission To store a document select Yes To cancel this operation select No 2700 File No 01 Store document NOTE To print a list of the documents stored in batch boxes press Setting List Other Lists Batch Tx Doc then Yes Printing a document stored in a batch box Press Setting Store Doc Settings Print 2 Press
169. fax number or advanced communica tion into a programmable one touch You can edit the number or name by overwrit ing or deleting the existing information in each step Press Setting Fax Settings Program One Touch Enter Edit 2 Press the program one touch number you want to register or edit Enter Edit select the number to enter edit Press Enter to continue red a ok Sb float fe 0 0 0 SS 3 Specify the destination You can specify multiple destinations e Press Dialing Options then enter the number using the numeric keys 2 e Specify the destination using the address book e Press Address Book Entry then specify the address book number e Press Group Tx then specify a group M T a Eac l Enter Enter location and select Others to set functions To go back select Back 002 Mike London Office Ontions EB004 Beth Chicago Office 8 005 Chanz Bel i ing Office ores 10 14 SPECIAL FEATURES 4 Press Others 5 Select the advanced communication Function select item to edit Delayed Tx FPolling F Code Tx OFF OFF OFF OFF o If you press Delayed Tx go to step 6 of the Delayed transmissions on page 10 15 o If you press Polling go to step 6 of the Polling reception on page 10 16 o If you press FPolling go to step 6 of the F code polling on page 10 18 o If you press F Code Tx go to step 6 of the F code transmission
170. fax you send Selecting TTI NOTE Register the TTI in advance For details on registering the TTI see page 1 20 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Others TTI Select 3 1 Select the TTI Fax Functions select the TTI that will on the header and press Enter TTI Select 1 Dallas Office General dep Si Account dep e TTI 1 your entered name The machine will send TTI 1 e TTI 2 your entered name The machine will send TTI 2 o TTI 3 your entered name The machine will send TTI 3 2 Press Enter to save the setting NOTE You can assign TTI Select to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 3 30 FAXING Sending faxes with TTI information attached 1 2 3 NOTE 6 Press FAX to display to the Fax standby mode Press Others Press TTI e ON and OFF toggle every time you press TTI Fax Functions Select item to edit a tof 2 text Macro Address FaxForward Fax amp Copy Program ON TTI 1 OFF OFF Delayed Tx Scan Size Polling Batch Tx Set it to ON when you send a fax with TTI information Set it to OFF when you send a fax without TTI information e You can assign TTI to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 e You can change the default setting for TTI See Accessing the default set tings on page 12 4 Press Enter Specify the destination e Use the numeric keys to dial th
171. fit specified Zoom value resolution or the zoom ratio to do the job This setting is protected The department management setting is protected To change the setting release the protection To initialize IP address IP address is entered or edited Power off and then on to save the setting you must shutdown Toner should be Toner is empty Replace with a new toner bottle replaced Too many characters You entered more characters than the limit Re enter them so that it contains the limit Too many locations You entered more location than the limit Re enter them so that it contains the limit TTI data has not been The Transmit Terminal Identifier TTI is not registered To select the TTI register the registered TTI in advance Unable to delete The job you selected was carried out before deleting Use the scanner glass You tried to make a zoom up copy using the ADF To make a zoom up copy use the document glass 14 22 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Check Message printouts When there is a problem with your machine detects an error it produces an error printout headed by the words Check Message This printout lists the following information about the fax transaction e The resulting error code See Error code next page e A communications error message See What error messages can mean below e The TTI or phone number of the fax machine with which your machine had attempted to communic
172. fter you entered the cover page message press Enter Printing the cover page To confirm that the cover page is set correctly print a sample cover page from your machine Press Setting List Other Lists Cover Page then Yes FAXING 3 33 Delayed transmission Setting up a delayed transmission Your machine can store up to 100 delayed commands each of which you can pro gram up to 31 days in advance Your machine only remembers the day of the month that it is supposed to send a delayed transmission It does not remember the month itself So if you want to send a transmission at 2 15 pm on 5 May do not program the transmission sooner than 2 16 pm on 5 April specified time so you will not be able to send any other faxes To set up a delayed transmission Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others Delayed Tx NOTE You can assign Delayed Tx to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 4 Enter the sending day and time Fax Functions Use the arrows or numeric keypad to adiust the time setting and select Enter Delayed Transmission Back Enter cic Day Hour Minute e Use A V lt gt or the numeric keys to enter the sending day and time 5 Press Enter twice 6 Specify the destination e Use the numeric keys to dial the number e Enter the e mail address manually See page 4 2 e Specify the destination using the address book
173. g e When memory transmission is turned off e When the machine s memory is full In Real time transmission the next page will not scan until the current page has been transmitted Notes for real time transmissions e The document glass cannot be used for real time transmission e You can dial only one destination Manual transmission Use manual transmission when the other fax machine uses manual reception or when you transmit after finishing a phone conversation Notes for manual transmissions e You can dial only one destination Memory overflow message 3 4 In normal memory transmission if you have stored too much information in your machine s memory a Memory overflow message will appear on the display Fay Ready Fax Ready Mode Memory overflow Humber of stored page 15 Store these pages This appears because 1 too many pages have been stored in the memory or 2 the pages that are stored have too much information on them for your machine to remember If this message appears press Yes to tell your machine to keep as many pages in memory as possible or press No to delete all pages stored during the current operation but not previous operations Dividing a large document into smaller batches will help you avoid this error Use real time transmissions to avoid these problems See Real time transmission page 3 8 NOTE If the machine is idle for 3 minutes the machine will automatic
174. g communication Wait until it ends progress Contact service for An internal error has occurred Contact your Muratec dealer printer option Continue to store The document has jammed while being stored into memory To continue storing press Yes No Yes to cancel the job press No Copy protected Copy is protected To copy set Copy protect to OFF During copy protection Macro program is disabled Copy reservation has Copy reservation is disable Wait until the present job is completed been disabled Cover Open Close XXX Cover The cover indicated on the LCD is open or has not been closed securely Close it prop erly DHCP server did not DHCP configuration failed Check the network connection If the LAN cable is not con respond nected connect it to the machine to connect to the LAN If the DHCP server is not installed on your network turn off the DHCP setting and register the IP address manually For more information refer to the Network Guide Dialing number has not You are selecting a non registered address book number Check the address book num been set ber and try again Document full You tried to store a document in a Batch Tx box but the machine has reached its capac ity 40 documents Delete unnecessary documents stored or use other Batch Tx box Document stored You tried to erase a batch box which contains at least one document To erase a batch box erase all the documents stored in t
175. g distance codes Block Junk Fax will block out calls from those faxes To set the mode for block junk fax Press Setting Fax Settings Other Settings 2 Press Block Junk Fax Other Settings Select item to edit Prev lof 3b Next Redial Attempts 2 Times Redial Interval 1 Min Black Junk Fax Humber of Rings 2 Times Dialing Pause 72 Seconds S F ine Resolution 400dpi 3 Press Setting Block Junk Fax Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Setting C 3 46 FAXING 4 1 Select the mode Block Junk Fax Select mode and press Enter L OFF 2 Press Enter The procedure will end if you select OFF or Mode 1 If you selected either Mode 2 or Mode 3 proceed to step 5 5 Press Enter Edit Block Junk Fax Select item to edit Fress Enter to continue Mode 6 Select a box to edit Enter Edit select a number to enter edit and press Enter NOTE To change numbers already registered select the box containing the number _ you want to edit FAXING 3 47 7 1 Using the numeric keys enter the last four digits of the fax number you want to block You can enter the last eight digit number to identify each fax number but only the last four digit number will be used for blocked number For example if you want to block a fax from someone with a number of 123 456 7890 you should enter 7 8 9 0 2 Press Enter 8 To enter
176. gement Enter the Passcode and select Enter Protect Passcode L E ccs RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 7 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E 3 Select desired mode and then press Enter Select OFF to deactivate the setting Management Select the PIN mode and press Enter PIN Mode 4 Press Reset to return to the standby mode Registering the address book Mode 1 In Mode 1 you must register the PIN into the address book Transmission will not be possible if a PIN number has not been registered If Mode 2 has been set this procedure is not neccessary Register or edit an entry in the address book See page 2 4 if necessary 2 During registration press PIN 001 Sam New York Office Select the address book item to enter edit Enter Mame Sam New York Office Fax No 1 5661 684 65168 Group 2S Group 01 5_Group 03 5 Group Ob Group 5 Group U1 S Group 03 5_ Group Ub PIN 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the desired PIN up to eight characters in length 001 Sam New York Office Enter PI PIN 123496 8_ ESE 4 Press Enter to save the PIN 5 Press Enter to save the address book setting 11 8 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE o If you press Enter without entering the PIN the machine will beep and display The following data is required PIN and then return to step 2 Press Reset to return to the standby mode Registering program one
177. gs press Enter Q To register another transfer rule repeat from step 3 Press Reset to return to the standby mode FAXING 3 55 Deleting a transfer rule NOTE When your machine is connected to the network you cannot register edit or delete the transfer rule from the machines control panel Use the Browser to register edit or delete the transfer rules For details on registering and editing the transfer rules using the Browser see Network Guide Press Setting Fax Settings Fax Forward Delete 2 Select the transfer rule you want to delete Delete select the forwarding location to delete 01 d001 d003 O2 0123456 769 03 11223344 004 d005 3 Press Yes to delete Delete select the forwarding location O1 60071 gpa Would you like to delete 4 To delete another transfer rule repeat from step 2 Press Reset to return to the standby mode NOTE To print a list of transfer rules press Setting List Other Lists Fax For ward then Yes See page 13 3 3 56 FAXING Separator page The separator page function can separate each received document by inserting blank paper between received fax jobs For example if you use the colored paper for the separator page it is easy to identify each individual fax job Setting the Separator page Press Setting Paper Settings Separate Rx Page Paper Settings select item to edit Cassette 1 Separate Let
178. he CD supplied with your machine PC PRINTING 9 3 PC PRINTING 9 4 PC PRINTING Chapter Ji 0 Special features ON Oy ae AE E EE E E AE E 10 2 Soft key functions s esessesseesssessreesssrerrsssrrerrsererrsssereeeesereeesssrreeessees 10 2 Programming a soft key seesssesseessssrerssssreessssreressssrersssrreeesserreesse 10 5 MATOR T e E EE AAE OEE 10 7 Registering or editing a MatroO esessessseeesesreressssrersssrrerssserreesss 10 7 Deleting a Macro K y eseeeesssesseeessssersssssreressrerrssssreressseeeessereeeese 10 10 Changing the Macro key speed ccccsssssscceeessssceceessseeeeeens 10 11 Editing macro key titles wise ccacaeseescavsedonadenisprcconcsodiertatsstaceticseees 10 12 Executing a Macro command ssssssssssesseressserrrsssrerrserrreesserreeese 10 13 Program one touch esssssessessssssererrerserreerrssssserrerssssssereeeessserreeeesssssens 10 14 Registering or editing a program one touch 10 14 Deleting a program one touch sssesseeeressesrerrrrssssrrrrrsrssesereees 10 19 How to use a program one touch ssesssssseeseerrerrsssrrerrssrrrrsserrerese 10 20 F code box feat fE secsciscssedassucedasaccutecaientectanandactsaasacssnaee tuseutetaseaadetacdt 10 21 F cod introd cti Ni eastside sas nesin E R 10 21 Registering or editing an F code bOX s eeeeeeeeeeeesseerrrrrrsserrre 10 21 Printing a list of F code OXes eeeeeseeesereeerrrrrsssrrerrrerrrrrsserreeese 10 30 Printing a lis
179. he box Drum should be The drum cartridge has run out Replace with a new drum cartridge eee Enter Enter location No No destinations are entered Enter at least one destination to register the setting are entered Enter at least one destination to No destinations are entered Enter at least one destination to register the setting the setting MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 17 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 Message on the display Description Solution Enter the sub address You tried to create an F code box without entering a sub address Sub address is a required field The image transfer failed Check the printed out Check Massage to identify the error Feeder In Use There is a manual delayed transmission reserved in the ADF Wait until the job is finished or cancel the delayed transmission by removing the document Follow Instruction A Follow the instruction that will be displayed on the screen to clean the charge wire Incorrect passcode The entered passcode is wrong Enter the correct passcode Invalid Address Book A non registered address book number is selected Either choose another number or Location manually dial the number Invalid characters have You entered invalid characters To register a Shortcut insert the PC name between been entered and To register a File Name special characters such as 7 0 lt gt or canno
180. he department management setting is activated the machine reminds each user to enter the department code before sending a document or making copies With this feature the fax transaction time and the copy charge can be managed by department After this setting is turned on assign a specific code to each user department and the machine will require them to enter their department code prior to job execution 1 Registering the copy charge per page See below 2 Registering department codes See page 11 14 3 Turning department management on See page 11 17 4 Using department codes See page 11 17 y 5 Checking the operating conditions See page 11 19 Registering the copy charge Cost management Register a cost per page for copying Press Setting Management Next Depart Management Management Select item to edit Prev 2of 3b Nert Journal Line Up DFF Depart Management Security Reception OFF Display Jobs in Queue Copy Protect OFF 2 Press Cost to register the copy charge Depart Management select item to edit Reset RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 13 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E 3 Use A YV or the numeric keys to enter the cost per page Depart Management Enter the per sheet copy charge and select Enter Cost Management Back Enter Input range 0 00 99 99 800 05 Page S 4 Press Enter 5 Press Reset to retu
181. he paper type for the 1st cassette 3 Press Cassette 1 Paper Settings select item to edit Ete cassette 2 Letter Letter Letter Print Cass Ru Page 1 30 GETTING STARTED 4 Select the paper size for the first cassette Paper Settings Select the paper type and press Enter Cassette 1 of Back Enter 5 Press Enter to save the setting LU Setting the paper size for the 2nd cassette 3 Press Cassette 2 4 Select the paper size for the second cassette Paper Settings Select the paper type and press Enter Cassette 200 Back Enter 5 Press Enter to save the setting GETTING STARTED 1 31 GETTING STARTED 1 32 LI Setting bypass tray paper 3 Press Bypass Paper Settings Select item to edit Enter Cassette I Cassette 2 Letter Letter weer int Cass Ru Page 4 Select the paper size for the bypass tray Paper Settings Select the paper type and press Enter Bypass Paper Type Back Enter Letter lessi H LTRD Fage Executive OL COMTO Monarch Fostcard OHF LTR AB AST 5 Press Enter to save the setting 6 Press Reset to exit and return to the standby mode GETTING STARTED Chapter Using the Address Book The address OO Ke sea aiesttyroce dca tacgderaeeaea etiseareteeerniueteousdeaasvnon aaevonendesstoens 2 2 The address book display ccccccsssssscccsssscccccesssseeceeesssseeseeesaees 2 2 Special dialing characters ccccccccsssc
182. he toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage If the problem persists contact Muratec dealer Contrast selected was too light Select a darker contrast setting The toner cartridge may be out of toner or the toner may be very low Replace the toner cartridge The paper is damp Replace the paper Contrast selected was too dark Select a lighter contrast setting The document glass or ADF glass is dirty Wipe the glass with a dry soft cloth The drum charge wire may be dirty Open the front cover To clean the drum charge wire pull the blue rod toward you making sure it fully extends Then return the rod to its original position See page 14 4 The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage If the problem persists replace the toner cartridge The drum cartridge may be defective Remove the drum cartridge and check it for damage If the problem persists replace the drum cartridge The paper you are using may have absorbed moisture perhaps due either to high humidity or water having been spilled on the paper supply Toner will not adhere well to wet paper Replace the paper with dry paper 14 30 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Printouts have white and or The ADF glass or rollers of the ADF may be dirty black lines Clean the ADF glass and or the rollers of the ADF See pages 14 2 to 14 4 The drum charge wire may be dirty
183. hine error Try the search again tion error Link Path is required You tried to register a shortcut without entering Link To register a Folder or FTP server shortcut you should enter the Link Load XXX paper Load the paper specified by the machine Load paper There is no paper either in the cassette or in the bypass tray Load paper Load paper for reception The paper run out during fax reception Load paper Load paper in the There is no paper either in the cassette or in the bypass tray Load paper bypass tray Load paper into the There is no paper in the XXX cassette Load paper in it XXX cassette You cannot press Macro Program while you are registering a Macro The transmission failed Check the printed out Check Massage to identify the error Memory full Printing There is not enough memory to store the print job Wait until some reserved jobs are will resume when mem finished and the memory becomes free is free Press OnLine to stop Memory overflow Rx Memory has overflowed during the fax reception Press Stop to return the standby screen 14 18 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Message on the display Description Solution You tried to enter more pages into memory than your machine could store Memory overflow Num You tried to store more pages into memory than your machine could store Press Yes to ber of stored page Store keep the scanned pages in memory or press No to delete all
184. hortcut 4 3 To delete a server s select the destination s you wish to delete and press Delete 4 Press Enter to return to screen 1 5 48 SCANNING Registering or editing an FTP server shortcut Registering an FTP server shortcut You can create an FTP File Transfer Protocol shortcut on your machine NOTE You can register up to 20 shortcuts Press Setting 2 Press Scanner Settings sett Ings Select item to edit Book Entry Settings Settings settings Settings Ekes pem Settings User i enazenen Install counter J tist 3 Press FTP Shortcut Scanner Settings Select item to edit Default Folder Eai aN 4 Press Add Edit FIP Shortcut Select item to edit Add Edit SCANNING 5 49 SCANNING oO 5 Select an empty key Add Edit Select a shortcut to enter edit 6 Press Shortcut Name Select a number to enter edit Back Enter Shortcut Name 7 Enter a shortcut name then press Enter The name can contain up to 24 characters If you do not register a name the FTP link will be displayed on the shortcut key When the link is too long to be displayed on the key it will be omitted at the center with and only the begin ning and ending of the link will be displayed Shortcut Name Enter the FIP shortcut name and select Entry Limit 5 50 SCANNING 8 Press Link Select a number to enter edit Shortcut Name FTP Shortcut
185. ht 20 24 lbs Paper to avoid To prevent jams and damage to your machine do not use the following e Creased paper e Very thick paper e Wrinkled paper e Paper previously printed on by a printer e Folded paper e Paper with holes e Curled paper e Envelopes with pressure seals e Torn paper e Extremely shiny or highly textured paper e Carbon paper e Moist paper e Very thin paper 1 26 GETTING STARTED Printable area The printable area is shown below 0 12 in 3 mm 0 12 in 3 mm Printable area He 0 12 in 3 mm 0 12 in 3 mm Loading paper into the paper cassettes NOTE After you load paper into the paper cassettes you need to set the paper size on the control panel See Setting of the paper size on page 1 30 GETTING STARTED 1 27 GETTING STARTED 4 Load the paper into the cassette e Before you insert paper in the cassette stack it so the leading edge and sides of the paper are even e Do not stack the paper over the limit mark inside of the cassette NOTE To prevent paper jams do not refill the paper cassette without first removing any remaining paper In other words do not just add sheets to an already loaded stack 6 Close the paper cassette 7 After loading paper in the paper cassette you need to set the paper size See Setting the paper size on page 1 30 amp Attach the paper size sticker supplied with your machine to th
186. iG sas snicrrccrereaciierieratiaeiss 3 13 MANUAL sisine arrr 3 13 Review commands c ccecceeeeees 6 2 results of fax transaction 6 8 S Scanner settings cccccecceeeceees 12 7 Scanning contrast 3 3 5 3 7 9 Scanning resolution 3 2 5 2 Scan Size aces csdessapsetveveansesseouss 3 41 5 5 Scan to e mail oo eee ceeseseceecees 5 9 Tersi RE a EEEE EE 5 15 selecting destination 5 11 sending ces ordcoscotvsonawadeasnsieeeieors 5 9 Scan to folder desde sececsiaccacerevoicetens 5 28 folder shortcut cee ee 5 33 registering editing folder shortcut 5 35 Scan to FTP 5 42 registering editing FTP shortcut 5 49 registering FTP shortcut 5 45 Security features ccccceeec wees 11 2 Security reception cceeec sees 11 3 Separate reception page 12 14 Separator Page cccccscccssccseceees 3 57 SOL KEYS seansie eceseces 10 2 SOLLIE tics renn NEEE 7 138 Sound settings ccccceeeceeeees 12 12 Stored document list 13 9 T Toner cartridge replacing isesirnnnisrnen 14 5 Transmission confirmation report 13 8 Troubleshooting seecccccecccecceeee 14 9 E a 3 30 Z LOO raen EA 5 57 7 12 APPENDIX amp INDEX AI 7 APPENDIX amp INDEX B H AI 8 APPENDIX amp INDEX
187. ia was entered correctly If this does not solve the problem contact your network administrator 5 16 SCANNING Advanced search You can add more criteria to your search by selecting Advanced Press SCAN on the control panel 9 Press e mail 3 Press Search 4 Press Advanced Simple Search Enter the search parameter and select Execute Entry Limit IH 2 Berver ME Look For 5 Enter your search criteria Select AND or OR Refer to the table below for definitions Enter the search parameter s and select Execute AND And noeneen Searches for contacts that meet all the entered criteria OR riesana Searches for contacts that meet any of the entered criteria Name Enter a name or a part of a name to be searched Fax nec Enter a fax number or a part of a fax number to be searched e mail Enter part of the e mail address to be searched Dept This means department It is not an independent field To use this field either the Name Fax or e mail should also be entered NOTE If you are entering the e mail field you may select Copy Name This will import information that has been entered in the Name field e If too many special characters such as umlaut are entered in each field the message LDAP reference execution error may appear and the LDAP searching will not be performed In this case decrease the special character entering SCANNIN
188. ice FFl tA004 Beth Chicago Office FA005 Chang Beijing Office 5 22 SCANNING Reviewing or changing your selected destinations When you have entered multiple destinations you can review cancel or change the broadcast status of the destinations NOTE This function is only available prior to scanning the document After the destinations have been entered press Location Scan Ready Select Location to confirm delete recipient Torexvvzz muratec com l Resolutions l aantast Va EEA a a E002 Mike London Office 2 Press Page Up or Page Downl and review all the entered e mail and folder destinations Confirm the locations and select Enter xeyy2Zemurtec com E001 Sam New York Office E002 Mike London Office 1 0 Eom O o e Page aliz 1140 SharedDocs 3 Every time you press To the status changes from To to Cc then Bcc in that order Press the key until it changes to your desired status Pressing Sort will sort the e mail destinations in To Cc and Bcc order 4 To delete e mail or folder destinations select the destinations to delete and press Delete 5 Press Enter to return to screen 1 SCANNING 5 23 SCANNING oO Adding a text message to your e mail When you send a document to an e mail address a fixed subject and text are entered automatically However you can manually enter an e mail subject line and text to the transmission Editing the subject line and
189. il ccsssssscceesssscecessssescccssseeccesssseescsssseesceesseaeeees 4 2 Entering an e mail address using the QWERTY keypad 4 2 Sree et eee enn REN ene ee neem ene T ee eee eee ee 4 3 IVY EM TAS ORY e tes vvunnpeaaicasestscsiesctesdseeuseesonstsnisvaceeseanuaeise 4 4 Reviewing or canceling commands cccccccessssccceessssceceesssseeeceessaees 4 6 Advanced mail MIT CHONG ox seccanasisbeicntevaocesedubseadidensavaaedenssesienseesenavetouns 4 6 Adding a text message to your Mail cceecccccesssesceeesssseeeeeens 4 7 Pateh Cana N eer EEE E EEE E 4 11 Checking for new e Mail eesseesesseressssrerrserrrrrssererresereresssrreressns 4 12 Specifying the attachment file format cccccccceessseeeeeeeeeees 4 13 Before sending e For details on available document types and how to set documents see Docu ment handling on page 1 24 to 1 25 e For details on scanning resolution and contrast see Scaning resolution on page 3 2 and Scanning contrast on page 3 3 e For details on memory overflow messages see Memory overflow message on page 3 4 Sending an e mail e For details on the address book see The address book display on page 2 2 e For details on registering or editing an e mail address see the following methods e Registering or editing a destination on page 2 4 e Alternative 1 Registering or editing directory into the address book on page
190. il Address Use this when manually entering e mail address for sending Mail History Displays the history of e mail address manually entered using QWERTY keypad Re mail Displays the e mail address to which you sent last e mail Subject Enable to edit a subject line and a message attached to e mail if necessary Batch Scan Makes on off setting for batch scan py p 4 11 Check Mail Use this to check new arriving e mail immediately ra p 4 12 File Format Use this to select the attachment format ra p 4 13 v possible to setup p 3 45 p 3 24 p 4 2 y v a aa lanl aa a on a pms paa pm un ma a pa a poa paa aa a ial Tx Report Makes on off setting for print the transmit confirma tion report v p 4 4 Delayed Tx Use this to make a delayed transmission SPECIAL FEATURES v EA o e alo EA eit a Dioner an mi Taroa KAN Fatos KAEA Program Onc KAN oam Sew me rms cover Page nna Daa KAEA Baa an Sean Set KAKA Pame KA Frie an code Tt orses KAN Memore KAN Diane Ono _ a Piet KAEA Toma ira ni These functions are only valid for the next transmission Once that transmission is complete the setting will return to its default setting If you want to change the default setting see Fax settings on page 12 4 SPECIAL FEATURES 10 3 Scan mode Each scan mode can have the same set of soft keys or you can customize each tab s soft keys Bradcat Usethisiomateabradc
191. il address and select Enter Entry Limit 14 50 Input range 001 300 dn 5 Would you like to register Unregistered number is displayed first If you select an address book number that has already been registered the e mail address will be overwritten with the new address 7 Follow steps 5 to 12 on pages 2 5 to 2 7 USING THE ADDRESS BooK 2 9 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK N Deleting a destination Press Setting 2 Press Address Book Entry then Delete Address Book Entry select item toa edit Enter Ed i ti Ene 3 Select the address book number you want to delete Delete select a number to delete Prev 4 tof 50m Next 4 Press Yes to delete Delete Select a number to delete d001 Sam New York Office Would you like to delete Press No to return to step 3 without deleting the number 5 To delete another destination repeat steps 3 to 4 Otherwise press Reset to return to the standby mode 2 10 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK Alternative Deleting directly from the address book Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Add Edit 3 Select the address book number you want to delete Address Book Add Edit select an address book entry to add edit dy001 Sam New York Office dy Q02 Mike fLondon Office dy003 Carl Paris Office d004 Beth Chicago Office d005 Chang Beijing Office z m Office aa 4 Press Delete amp 001 Sam New York Office select the add
192. ings List Copy Set tings then Yes Fax Settings List Lists the current fax settings To print this list press Setting List Settings List Fax Settings then Yes Scanner Settings List Lists the current scanner settings To print this list press Setting List Settings List Scanner Set tings then Yes System Settings List Lists the current machine settings To print this list press Setting List Settings List System Set tings then Yes Function List Prints the functions available on your machine To print this list press Setting List Settings List Function List then Yes 13 2 Report amp LISTS Store Doc List Prints how much memory each stored document is using To print this list press Setting List Settings List Store Doc List then Yes Lists total communication time printed pages of fax reception total copy page copy charge and the sum of copy charge To print this list press Setting List Settings List Department List then Yes Macro List Lists the each key s Macro key number and the name of the job stored in the Macro key To print a program list press Setting List Settings List Macro List then Yes Program One Touch Lists the program one touch number the address book number and List the fax number the time to start transmission each program one touch setting assigned to each key for program one touch
193. ings sccincisarssnivcatarswaeteces 12 3 COVEY page ccccsccessceesccenscesceees 3 32 D Delayed transmission 3 34 Department management 11 13 Dial UCU seoniesmsnarnssinione 3 44 Document handling 1 24 acceptable documents 1 24 Document jams cccscceeceeeees 14 9 Document size ccccsccsessesesonsees T 2171 Document type cc cece eee 5 4 7 8 Drum cartridge replacing ccceseceseceeceeneeeees 14 7 Duplex copy coasecticdersctincovaussencct 7 16 Duplex scanning soccer 5 61 E e mail subject ceecee 4 7 5 24 ECM mode ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 12 6 Energy save mode 1 23 12 12 Erased document notification 13 10 Errors COpyIng dastedcondeaceosanyessseatates ses 14 28 12 1 0 IE EA 14 26 local scanner cceeeeeee eee 14 29 MACHINE sorse 14 26 PC printing eseeeessesseccscrrces 14 28 Scanning eesssessserssessserseesssess 14 27 Error codes cccccseeecceeeeeeeeeees 14 24 Error messages cceeeceeeeeeeees 14 16 F F code box feature 006 10 21 PAS amp CODY sooni 3 28 Fax forwarding ccccceeeeeeeees 3 51 Fax reception print settings eeeseeceesessesees 3 20 Fax reception mode 666 3 15 ans fax ready mode 3 16 fax tel ready mode 3 16 fax ready mode 000ce0es 3 16 tel fax ready m
194. is no text entered Enter the text in advance text when there is no text entered Enter the text in advance Please install the drum The drum cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in your machine cartridge correctly Please properly install the drum cartridge Please install the toner The toner cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in your machine cartridge correctly Please properly install the toner cartridge Please Remove Paper Paper has jammed in the machine Follow the instruction on the display and removed the jammed paper Please set up Security The Security Reception is not set up To use this function set up Security Reception in Reception advance Please Supply Paper There is no paper either in the cassette or in the bypass tray Load paper Please wait Your machine s printer is either warming up or busy Please wait until the machine is finished printing and then re try your command or operation Preparing Your machine s printer is either warming up or busy Please wait until the machine is finished printing and then re try your command or operation Press Stop to end the Document remains from the operation prior to the interrupt Press Stop to discharge the document Cu a Press the Fax Cancel STOP is pressed during fax transmission Cancel the transmission by Fax Cancel Job key to stop the trans Confirm mission Printer in use The machine cannot
195. ityRx NOTE You can assign SecurityRx to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 3 1 Use the numeric keys to enter the protect passcode Fax Functions Enter the Passcode and select Enter Protect Passcode Back Enter na E ccs 2 Press Enter 4 1 Select either ON or OFF Fax Functions Select ON OFF and press Enter Security Reception Back Jj Enter Select ON to electronically store documents if they are received after a set time To allow document printouts select OFF 2 Press Enter 5 Press Reset to return to the standby mode RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 5 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E Printing documents stored in memory Press Setting Store Doc Settings Print Security Rx Doc 2 Use the numeric keys to enter the protect passcode and then press Enter Print Enter the Passcode and select Enter Protect Passcode Back Enter peek Ez 3 Press Yes to print out documents received during security reception Print Enter the Passcode and select Enter security Rs Doc Would vou like to print e Your machine will print all the documents received in the memory and then erase them from the memory Then the machine turns the security reception off until the next time you have scheduled security reception o If the reception box is empty No document stored Security Reception has been cancelled message wi
196. ke London Office 3 Press Enter 4 To start the transmission press Start FAXING 3 27 Fax amp Copy Documents can be faxed and copied simultaneously with just one scanning opera tion This function is useful for internal communications when copies need to be made after sending a fax NOTE If the copy protect is set to ON Fax amp Copy cannot be used See page 11 22 e Resolution for Fax amp Copy will be either Fine or S Fine No other selections are available Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others Fax amp Copy NOTE You can assign Fax amp Copy to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 4 Press ON and then Enter Fax Functions Select ON OFF and press Enter Fax amp Copy Z 5 Fax amp Copy is now set Press Enter again 3 28 FAXING 6 Specify the destination Fax fy Copy zs Fax Ready Mode Select Location to confirm delete recipient To E002 Mike London Office EEE earch Index lllLocation Be O01 Sam New York Office eT E001 Sam New York Office E 4 O02 Mike London Office Redial i EMTA AEN H003 Carl Paris Office History J Others A e Use the numeric keys to dial the number e Enter the e mail address manually See page 4 2 FAXING co e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page3 2
197. kly review or cancel the folders you selected NOTE This function is only available prior to scanning the document After the destinations have been selected press Location 2 Press Page Up or Page Down and review all the entered folders and e mail destinations Location Confirm the locations and select Enter or press Start to bezgin transmission Z T E001 Sam New York Office To 002 Mike London Office DOCUCENTREBO5 DRIVERS B01 Reports Page aliz 71140 SharedDocs 3 Every time you press To the status changes from To to Cc then Bcc in that order Press the key until it changes to your desired status ot 2 Pressing Sort will sort the e mail destinations in To Cc and Bcc order 4 To delete e mail or folder destinations select the destinations to delete and press Delete 5 Press Enter to return to screen 1 5 34 SCANNING Registering or editing a folder shortcut Registering a folder shortcut You can create a folder shortcut on your machine NOTE You can register up to 20 shortcuts Press Setting 2 Press Scanner Settings sett Ings Select item to edit Book Entry Settings Settings settings Settings Ekes pem Settings User i enazenen Install counter J tist 3 Press Folder Shortcut Scanner Settings Select item to edit Default Folder FTF Hn 4 Press Add Edit Folder Shortcut Select item to edit Ad
198. l settings eseseessssseresssssreressssreesssssrrersssereresssrreeresserreeesserrreesssens 1 16 Using the Energy Save mod e ccccccccccsssssscceesssssseccccesssseeeccecessseeeececessnseesecessssseeeeeeess 1 23 Document and paper handling sc isiousccdsannactonvicaasenontarassunedvedsawesevondivactaceutacaisonaetacdinansecone 1 24 Document bandhing scearon rE a Eia NEAD IEAA Eai 1 24 Pap r hand lin f ssassn sodeedacesipladeapats anedesontaculssudentuaee toadeaea cans REEN EIE iSi 1 26 Chapter 2 Usinge the Address Book cece eececacisscceccescarsavesnceseeisessccasissccesceteecedecvactavscssanevavisssdectevseveceeracesvsassenee 2 1 Theaddress DOOR serasi a EEE aa 2 2 The address Dook display eccirni ne E a EE 2 2 Special dialing characters isis wveauacsaevacuenwiosvaionectesimnaeauann P ANNE nK ETEak EA EA TES Ei 2 3 Registering destinations in Address Book ccccccsssssscccesssscceeceessseeeccessssseeeceeessaeeeees 2 4 Registering or editing a destination cccccessssscccesssssceceeesesseeeeccsssssseecceeeesseeeeeeeseaees 2 4 Alternative 1 Registering or editing directly into the address book cc0c0ee 2 7 Alternative 2 Registering or editing the fax number using the numeric keys 2 8 Alternative 3 Registering an e mail address using the QWERTY keypad 2 9 Deleting a destination si atecesncinsedagherstuiasitututecteninnaieaccinsisdalessaeaiteste ateden sedis aeonaciaiegia
199. la Do not touch Nicht ber hren Ne touchez pas No tocar N o toque Non toccare uali Y I 10 Symbols and terms In this manual the following symbols terms and abbreviations are used Please familiarize yourself with them WARNING CAUTION IMPORTANT NOTE Document Paper Tx This symbol indicates how to avoid serious or potentially fatal injuries This symbol indicates how to avoid personal injury This instruction describes conditions or incorrect operations that could cause damage to your machine A note describes helpful hints restrictions and how to avoid problems The names of the keys on the control panel Items that appear on the display Original sheet s of paper you send copy and scan on your machine Paper to be printed on Denotes sending Denotes receiving Shows the direction of the document and paper Direction mark Document placed on the ADF or Paper loaded in the document glass paper cassette p or Nothing Ex Letter Ly Ex Half letter y The document glass is available only for MFX 2030 MFX 1480 model I 11 Main Features Copy Card Copy MFX 2030 1430 only see page 7 25 Need to copy both sides of an id card driver s license or check Use the Card Copy mode to quickly capture card or check size images onto a single sheet aZ I Combine Copy See page 7 14 Up to four separate images can be combined onto a single document reducing paper consumpti
200. legal sized paper as well as applications that use large volumes of letter I 17 I 18 Chapter Getting Started Machine Overview een nee ee ene E E ne 1 2 Machine LAY OU sccssivsscdeciesadssuseonticsrasneldusnsassasoorgeteiieslasbaavedveesierdeseds 1 2 Control panel overvieW cccecccccessssccssceessscesccesssseeecesssseesceeseaees 1 3 ODore E meee E nee ete 1 4 CHa E 1010 6 21 ae e en 1 4 Operating the display wisivsicsscisscsccssacapatensscavdavendandssasoeraiesaueneadasdbous 1 4 Display description sensuren in ane 1 4 Key displays and functions ccessvscesavcsedesedonispdoconssnddeoeaiuaieaehiveanebdees 1 9 Enterine charactors scnroepriikre rnei a n NEOA Ei 1 10 Memory back up sssssessesssresssssrrssssrerrsssereesssrreresssrreesserreeesserreesse 1 13 boni eS U ape suensaescececotaceaanesieaexstaiseues A A PAA ATT 1 14 Clearing stored settings eeeeeceeessersssssrerrserrerrsssrrrrrserererssrreressees 1 14 On SEA E r E E A E E 1 15 Specifying the initial settings eeeessessereeerrrrressrrrrrserrrrrserrerrssres 1 16 Using the Energy save m0de cccccscccscsssssssccessssssccesssseesceens 1 23 Document and paper handling eeeeesesserseessrrrsssrrrrsssrrerrssrrerrsserrressens 1 24 Document handig soniers an eean ir arees 1 24 Paper handling esseeseeesessreressesresssssrersssereesssreressssreesserreeessereeesse 1 26 Machine overview Machine layout Automatic document feeder guides
201. ll appear and the display will return to the standby mode 11 6 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE PIN masking To prevent unauthorized long distance calls some PBX private branch exchanger systems require a PIN personal identification number entry when dialing a num ber Your machine s PIN masking feature helps you keep that PIN number private With PIN masking activated you can dial a number plus a PIN but the PIN will not appear in the journal error message printout delayed command list or TCR trans mit confirmation report The PIN may contain up to eight characters including the or symbols You can enter them from the numeric keys There are three possible PIN masking settings e Off Deactivates PIN masking Any PIN you enter will appear on the display and or printouts which show the number you dial e Mode 1 Each remote fax machine has a PIN access code per department e Mode 2 Each fax user has a PIN access code per department NOTE If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using the batch transmission feature you must store the PIN access code within the appropriate batch box Activating the PIN mask NOTE To use this feature passcode protection must be active See page 11 2 Press Setting Management Prev PIN Model Management select item to edit PIN Mode Scan Lamp Sleep Mode 2 Use the numeric keys to enter the protect passcode and then press Enter Mana
202. lure caused by or resulting from any of the following improper unpacking or installation unau thorized service or parts or improper maintenance or cleaning modification or repair by the Customer accident including without limitation unavoidable accidents fire flood or other Acts of God improper telephone or electrical power or surges thereof interconnection with or use of non compatible equipment or supplies including paper or placement of the product in an area which does not conform to Muratec space electrical and or environmental requirements l 3 4 Muratec will not be required to make adjustments repairs or replacements if the product is installed or used at a location deemed by Muratec to be hazardous to health or safety or if Muratec is not provided with free and reasonable access to the product and a telephone during service availability hours or if the product location is not accessible by an authorized Muratec service vehicle EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH ABOVE AND EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLI CABLE LAW MURATEC MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE AND MURATEC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED HEREIN IN THE EVENT THE PROD UCT IS NOT FREE FROM DEFECTS AS WARRANTED ABOVE THE CUSTOMER S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE
203. mail 3 Press Search Scan Ready Sep 26 2005 a mml Memory 100 ioni arch EA Address Ji SCANNING 5 15 SCANNING oO 4 Use the QWERTY keypad or numeric keys to enter criteria This should contain the contact name part of the contact name or part of the e mail address 1 search parameter and select is Entry Limit 0 5 Press Execute 6 Every name and e mail address including the criteria will be displayed If there are no results Hit 0000 will be displayed Press Page Up and Page Down to search the results If the address displayed is from the LDAP server it will have an 2 next to it Select this button to view the contact information and or register the contact into your address book Press Close to close the window Search Results Select a contact s and press Enter Hit 0019 A 129 5ah murate com A absdfg muratec com e mail 7 If your search yields too many contacts select Narrow List to further narrow your search 8 Ifyou want to start a new search press New Search and search again Refer to steps 4 to 6 how to search Q Continue searching until you find your desired contact s If you press Back on the Simple Search screen you will return to the Search Results screen e Press Cancel to return to the standby screen 10 Select the desired destination s NOTE If you cannot find your desired contact s please confirm that the search criter
204. ment guides are not slid up against the edges of the document Slide the document guides against the edges of the document Curled paper was loaded into the paper cassette Flatten the paper before loading it The document glass and the document pad is available for MFX 2030 MFX 14380 only MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 31 If you cannot solve the problem If you have a problem with your machine that you cannot solve with the information provided in this chapter contact your local Muratec dealer or call the Muratec Customer Support Center at 800 347 3296 from U S only CAUTION If you detect odd sounds smoke or odor emitting from your machine unplug it immediately and contact your local Muratec dealer Do not attempt to disas semble or repair the machine yourself IMPORTANT Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty When you contact the Muratec Customer Sup port Center make sure you have the following information ready e Product name F 560 or F 520 or MFX 2030 or MFX 1430 e Serial number located on the label located at the back of the machine e Details of the problem e Steps taken to try to resolve the problem and the results Bar code label DA700123456789 8CA Close up the bar code label looks something like this but with a different set of numbers 14 32 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Chapter
205. ments containing photographs or drawings 300 dpi with letters Documents with letters 300 dpi Photographs or drawings 300 dpi Text High Res Documents with letters 600 dpi Text amp Photo High Documents containing photographs or drawings 600 dpi Res with letters Photo High Res Photographs or drawings 600 dpi This resolution requires more memory If you try to copy several pages at once the memory may overflow To select the document type Press Doc Type 2 Select the document type Copy Ready cease Select the document type and press Enter Document Type Back Enter High Res High Res High Res This mode allows the machine to know what type of document is being scanned 3 Press Enter NOTE You can change the default setting for Doc Type See Accessing the copy set tings on page 12 3 7 8 COPYING Contrast You can lighten or darken the document pages you are copying To change the contrast setting Press Contrast 2 Select one of the contrast types Copy Ready ee pal Adiust the contrast and select Enter SS Normal Lighter Darker Lightest Darkest 3 Press Enter NOTE You can change the default setting for Contrast See Accessing the copy set tings on page 12 3 Number of copies Each job can contain up to 99 copies Use the numeric keys to enter the desired number of copies 01 99 COPYING 7 9 COPYING BA Advanced copy functi
206. mm No 001 001 SamNew York Office RAOO MikeLondon Office Page 00 Doc 5 2e Letter e Press Tx Start when all the documents have been scanned Q Fax transmission will start Y Z 2 z NOTE If you want to cancel a transmission while the document is scanning press Stop If you want to cancel a transmission that is in progress use the Review Com mands feature See Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands on page 6 1 e Transmission reservation can be performed while communicating The reserved transmission will start when the current communication is com pleted Transmission can be reserved for up to 100 communications o If the call fails see Redialing on page 3 13 FAXING 3 7 Real time transmission non memory transmission Your machine will dial the remote fax machine and once contact is made scanning and transmitting will proceed in real time e With real time transmission you can watch each page as it is scanned and sent To perform a real time transmission Set the document in the ADF NOTE The document glass cannot be used for real time transmission 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2 4 Press Others Prev or Next Memory Tx then press Enter Fax Functions select item to edit a 201 2 FPolling F Code Tx OFF OFF OFF ON i a JC JCS Options Address Subject Batch Scan
207. mple of Time Zone GMT 11 00 Midway Island GMT 10 00 Hawaii GMT 09 00 Alaska GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada GMT 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada GMT 04 00 Atlantic Time Canada GMT 03 30 Newfoundland GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna GMT 01 00 Belgrade Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris GMT 09 00 Osaka Sapporo Tokyo Seoul GMT 10 00 Guam 3 Press Enter to save the setting 1 22 GETTING STARTED Using the Energy save mode When the machine has been idle for a predetermined amount of time the Energy Save mode will activate to conserve power By default the machine will automati cally enter the Energy Save mode after 5 minutes of idle time While the Energy Save mode e The machine stops the pre heating for printing and turn off the display However the scanner lamp will not shut off e Energy Save lights in green to indicates that the machine is in the Energy Save mode e Press Energy Save to recover from the Energy Save mode NOTE The Energy Save mode will not activate in the following cases even if you press Energy Save e While scanning documents e When a document is set in the ADF Energy Save mode will not
208. muratec www muratec com Muratec America Inc 3301 E Plano Parkway Suite 100 Plano Texas 75074 Muratec America Inc 2005 Printed in China murotec e MFX 2030 MFX 1430 F 560 F 520 Plain paper digital Fax Copier Printer Scanner User Guide As an Energy Star partner Muratec has determined that this prod louergge uct meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency SU PER Super G3 is an extension of Group 3 fax technology standards allow ing the use of high speed ITU T V 34 modems for 33 6 Kbps transmis sion and high speed protocols for rapid handshaking JBIG Joint Bi level Image experts Group the new ITU T standard image data compression method As JBIG compresses the data more efficiently than MMR it is especially effective when transmitting half tone grayscale image document WITH JBIG COMPRESSION QuadAccess 2 QuadAccess QuadAccess is a more powerful version of what already is a pretty Qa powerful feature called dual access While a fax with normal dual access allows you to do two things at once QuadAccess allows you to do four operations at once For example even if the machine is 1 printing a copy 2 transmitting from memory and 3 scanning docu ments for a different memory transmission you can still 4 program the machine Trademarks Muratec the Muratec logo and all Muratec product names contained herein are trademarks of Murata machinery Ltd and Mura
209. n lt ONILOOHSTIINOUAL 29 HONVNALNIV IAL 3 Pull the used toner cartridge out MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 5 4 Unpack the toner cartridge from its carton Then holding the toner cartridge with both hands gently shake it to distribute the toner evenly inside the car tridge NOTE Do not touch the roller on the toner cartridge 7 Close the front cover 14 6 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Replacing the drum cartridge When the drum is near the end of life the machine will show The drum is low on the display You should obtain a replacement drum cartridge soon When the machine shows Drum should be replaced it cannot print until the drum cartridge has been replaced To replace the drum cartridge Open the side cover and front cover 2 Turn the toner cartridge locking lever to the left unlock position then pull the toner cartridge out The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the drum cartridge MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Unpack the new drum cartridge from its carton and slide it into the machine firmly until it locks into place 1 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 7 5 Reinstall the toner cartridge and turn the cartridge locking lever to the right until it locks into place 14 8 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Document jams Case 1 If a document jams in the ADF the following di
210. n 3 5 Memory transmission eeeeseeeessssseseereresssssssrereeressssseerrereeesssesererereesseseeereeeeessssserereeeesssees 3 5 Real time transmission non memory transmission eesessssessssrrissrrresereressreressrrersssees 3 8 Manual transmission non memory tLANSMISSION ccceccscessssseceesssseceesseeeeessseeeeens 3 9 Changing Document Scan in Mid Scan Mixed Transmission cc cccccscceeseeeeeees 3 10 Poa A E E 3 13 Aut matic fax redia Ng scteicacactocectatvsivastcsatasoucctaasinijadsauadusdvusdstaisecudietauscbuivaasedecaciatones 3 13 Manual redia lini eisirean aara E A E NERE O NENEA 3 13 TRC BV AINE a laK esrearjiani ri inia Aa EEES E T REEE EA AE IA 3 15 Selecting the reception mode sssssssesssssseresssssreresssereesssssrressssereresssrreeressereeeesserrreesssees 3 15 Manual reception MOLE 5 iets scensarcaceaecciaenceaccamcaucontucucesdusennnasaaoncontuamsaasoustanaanmsencncianeceent 3 15 Automatic reception mode seesessssseesssseessssresssretsssreressreresereressreesssrersssreseseeesssreesserees 3 16 Answering calls manually eeeeseeeseeessssseressssrersssssrerresssreeresssrreessssererssssereresssereeressereees 3 17 If paper runs out during fax reception eessssesseressssseesssssrrerssssreresssrreeresserreeesserrreesssens 3 17 Settings for fax 216 2 0 010 Bean ec oe a Ara NENNT E EEEREN E ee er 3 20 Setting the number of rings ccccessscccceesssscceccecssseesccesssssseecccessseeeeceses
211. n length 5 28 SCANNING 6 All accessible networks will be displayed To scroll use Page Up and Page Down Network Navigation Memory 100 R DOM WORKGROUP RE DOM WORKGROUP DOM_WORKGROUPS DOM_WORKGROUP4 DOM_WORKGROUPS 7 Select the network that contains your desired folder 8 Search through the network folders until you find the specific folder you wish to scan to Network Navigation Select folder destination and press Enter Memory 100 DOM_WORKGROUP1 L starr bopa SCANNING oO e To go up one step press Back e To return to the first screen press Root Q Ifthe user name and password are required to login to the file server press UserName Otherwise skip to step 13 Cancel Password SCANNING 5 29 10 Enter the user name then press Enter If your machine is on a windows domain controlled network add the domain name after the user name with an like sam dom_muratec The user name can contain up to 50 characters All ASCII characters are available Network gt UserName Enter the User Name and select Enter Entry Limit Cancel UserName MURATEC Password 12 Enter the password then press Enter The password can contain up to 32 characters All ASCII characters are available Network gt Password Enter the Fassword and select Enter Entry Limit NOTE The entered password is displayed using asterisks 13 Press Start 5
212. n your machine you can toggle ON or OFF for fax forwarding when the transfer rule has been configured e When your machine is not connected to the network You can set the simply fax forwarding rule from the control panel The following are descriptions when the machine is not connected to the network For details of configuring fax forwarding setting using a web browser refer to the Using a web browser of the Network Guide Turning fax forwarding ON or OFF NOTE To turn ON fax forwarding you must register at least one transfer rule Select ON in the fax forwarding setting to switch the individual transfer rules to ON Faxes will be forwarded according to the registered rules Press Setting Fax Settings Fax Forward Setting Fax Forward Select item to edit Setting When your machine is connected to the network 2 1 Select ON to perform fax forwarding Fax Forward Select ON OFF and press Enter 2 Press Enter FAXING 3 51 3 Fax forwarding is now set Press Reset to return to the standby mode Alternative There is another useful method to turn fax forwarding ON and OFF This set ting links to the setting for Turning fax forwarding ON or OFF NOTE To turn fax forwarding ON you must register at least one transfer rule Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Others 3 Press FaxForward to set the fax forwarding to ON Fax Func
213. nation using the address book CR search Add Edit F tone 001 Sam MNew York Office Tone f Un a O02 Mike London Office 003 Carl Paris Office P A NEET 9 UR Gla G04 Beth Chicago Office f F O05 Chang Beijing Office Redial NOTE For details on how to use the address book see page 2 12 USING THE ADDRESS Book 2 19 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK N If the call fails If the call fails the next steps will depend on the type of call it was fax or phone If it was a fax call Your machine will automatically redial the number It will keep trying until one of the following occurs e It successfully reaches the other number e The maximum redial attempts has been reached If it was a regular phone call You will have to redial manually Lift the handset 2 Press Redial 3 Your machine can remember the last 10 dialed numbers Select the number you want to call 4 Press Start How to receive a phone call Lift the handset when the machine rings NOTE You can receive a call with the machine s handset even if the power has been turned OFF 2 Answer the phone Adjusting the optional handset volume 2 20 The small switches on the side of your machine s handset adjusts the ringer and receiver volume e Ringer Volume Control Adjust the ringer volume to one of three settings High Medium or Low e Receiver Volume Control If it is hard to hea
214. nctions Use the numeric keypad or arrow keys to enter the address book location and select Enter Address Book Back JEnter Input range 001 300 d001 Sam New York Office a w g This will send to a pre registered address book location 2 Press Enter 7 1 Press Fax or e mail You can select both Fax and e mail Address Book Select Fax e mail or both locations and then press Enter Back Enter d001 Sam New York Office To begin transmission select Start 2 Press Enter twice 8 Press Start USING THE ADDRESS Book 2 13 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK N Call group dialing If you frequently send the same fax e mail message to several destinations use call group dialing Call groups can store several destinations so you can quickly broad cast to multiple destinations by using this feature Registering or editing a call group Your machine can store up to 32 call groups Press Setting Group 2 Press Add Group Select Add to register a new group or select the group vou want to edit 3 1 Enter the group name Name Enter the group name and select Enter _ Entry Limit Of 24 The group name must be registered e Up to 24 characters can be entered e For details on character entry see page 1 10 2 Press Enter 2 14 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK 4 1 Press Group Members 2 Specify the destination s to add to the group e Specify
215. nd back of an id card or check sized original can be copied onto one sheet of paper by using the document glass Two id card sized originals can be also copied at the same time Document orientation When copied onto _y When copied onto ly paper paper 7 i E Ed BE Personal Check Business Check NOTE NOTE Copying can be done with the platen cover open Avoid looking at the light can be done with the platen cover open Avoid looking at the light while copying Looking at the light could cause eye damage e Card Copy is available only from the document This function is not available for F 560 F 520 Set the card or check on the document glass 2 1 Press Copy to display the copy standby mode 2 Press Card Copy Copy Ready eesti Memory 100 COPYING 7 25 COPYING Ba 3 1 Select the type of object you want to copy 2 Press Advance Copy Ready Select the original document size and press Enter Card Copy idywance Check Check 4 1 Press Paper to select the paper e You can change the type of object by pressing Card Copy Card Copy Select Enter to continue To go back press Card Copy Card Letter 2 Press Enter twice 5 Press Start 6 Once scanning has completed turn over all of the placed originals and press Next Doc e The Next Doc setting can be deleted by pressing Complete set next document set next doc Memory 1004 7 26 COPYING
216. nd press Enter Copy Protect Back Enter The selection of the Copy Mode screen can be prohibited 11 22 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 4 Press Enter to save the setting If copy protection is active whenever someone tries to switch the machine to the copy mode the machine will beep and display Copy protected NOTE When you set the copy protect to ON you cannot use the macro program RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 23 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E 11 24 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE Chapter Ji 2 Machine Settings Machine setting MENU sec cxccuceacderannencunseseeiresacianss iaa e iea 12 2 Copy settings seeesesseesssesseresssreresssreersssreresssrrersssreresssrreesssereeessereeeessseess 12 3 Accessing the copy settings cccccccccessssssccessssseecceesseeeceesssseeees 12 3 Pe a E E E EE ENR 12 4 Accessing the default fax Setting cccccccssssssscceessseesceeessseeees 12 4 Accessing Other fax settings ccccccccccssssssccesssssseccessseesceesssseeees 12 5 gt OFS HOTA Gc 5 LCT 6124 eee ene nn a oe OTD ee en ee en 12 7 Accessing the default scan settings ccccsssscscceesssseeceessseeees 12 7 Accessing other scan SCULINGS wis cccsenacsssdssescciesrsessainseasaoneasutvoractannse 12 8 Mail setinden EET 12 9 Accessing the mail settings esseesesesserreseserersssreressereressereeressrrees 12 9 Management settihgS scra en ee ne 12 11 Accessing the manageme
217. ne e mail SCANNING 5 59 SCANNING oO Selecting the file format You can select the file format for the scanned document The following formats are available Monochrome documents TIFF or PDF Color documents JPEG or PDF Press SCAN on the control panel 2 Press e mail Folder or FTP 3 To scan color documents press Color to toggle the key to ON 4 Press Others 5 Press File Format Scan Functions Select item to edit Program 1002 Letter OFF DuplexScanliBatch Scar igen Address e mai Mai NOTE You can assign FileFormat to the soft key See Soft keys from page 10 2 6 Select the desired file format This explanation shows the monochrome file format options When color scan is activated the settings for Mono are grayed out and the Color file formats are selectable Scan Functions Select the file format and press Enter File Format Back E Color 7 Press Enter NOTE You can change the default setting for FileFormat See Accessing the default scan settings on page 12 7 5 60 SCANNING Duplex scanning You can easily scan a two sided document using this mode Just load page one of the duplex document in the ADF and press Start the machine will prompt you on the following steps The machine will automatically sort the pages into the correct order NOTE To use this function the document type should be set first The illustration below sh
218. ners and computers generate electronic noise that can interfere with the operation of your machine Avoid extreme high low temperatures Use your machine within the temperature range of 10 C to 32 C 50 50 F to 89 6F F to 89 6 F 10 C to 32 C l 5 Power requirements Use a standard AC 120 V outlet Use a standard three pronged 120 V electrical outlet to power your AC 120V machine Using any other electrical outlet could damage your machine i Do not share an extension cord connector with other plugs This could cause electrical shock High consumption appliances such as refrigerators and air condition ers can cause draw downs which could damage your machine Plug in the power cord Plug the power cord carefully and completely into a wall outlet Do not leave any portion of the electrical cord s metal plugs exposed Doing so could cause a fire and increases the risk of electrical shock Make sure the outlet is not controlled by a wall switch If it is you will risk occasional shutoffs to the machine causing you to lose fax message Use an electrical surge suppressor preferably one which guards both telephone and electrical lines This device helps to shield your machine from damaging high voltage electrical surges Space requirements To ensure proper ventilation and easy operation set up the machine in an area that meets the minimum requirements for clearance as illustrated below
219. ng mode in ing Fax amp Copy Fax amp Copy is not available 14 16 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Message on the display Description Solution Cannot store in a secure You tried to store a document in an F code Secure box If you need to store documents box use an F code Bulletin box Cannot use the same You cannot use the same protect code for Read Write and Read Only Enter a differ code for both Read Write ent one and Read Only Check Paper Source The selected paper is not suitable for copying or printing Select other paper source Check the paper size The loaded paper does not match the paper registered in the machine Open amp Close Front Set correct sized paper or change the paper size setting Open and close the front cover to reset the printer cover Close XXX Cover The cover indicated on the display is open or has not been closed securely Close it properly Close XXX cassette The paper cassette indicated on the LCD is open or has not been closed securely Close it properly Close the Scanner Unit The scanner unit is open Close the scanner unit Communication error A communication error disrupted the reception or transmission If you were trans mitting press Stop to clear the error message and then re try the transmission If you were receiving a fax try to contact the other person and have him her re try the transmission Communication in The function is not available durin
220. ng or editing an FTP server shortcut on pages 5 49 to 5 55 5 46 SCANNING Scanning documents using an FTP shortcut NOTE The FTP server shortcut should be registered in advance For more informa tion see Registering or editing an FTP server shortcut on pages 5 49 to 5 55 NOTE Scanning will begin once the shortcut key has been pressed If you want to scan to multiple FTP shortcuts select the Broadcast prior to destination selec tion Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press FTP 4 Select the desired shortcut If it is not displayed press Page Up or Page Down FIP Select sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 1002 O2 FTP Shortcut 2 ev0S FTP Shortcut 3 FF a4 FTP Shortcut 4 File Name f 05 FTP Shortcut 5 Others IR l06 FTP Shortcut c SCANNING 5 47 SCANNING a Reviewing or canceling selected FTP servers You can quickly review or cancel the FTP servers you have selected Note This function is only available prior to scanning the document After the FTP servers have been selected press Location ale 33 G0 2 FTP shortcut 2 ol G04 FTP Shartcut 4 cs GY05 FTP Shortcut 5 MEM GEOG FTP Shartcut 6 an 2 Review the entered FTP servers Confirm the locations and select Enter or press Start to begin the transmission Back H Enter MURATE COM SERVER_FTP_2 MURATEC COM FTP_7_TEMP mv02 FTP Shortcut 2z E03 FTP Shortcut 3 ELO4 FTP S
221. ng your machine clear the built in user data This insures that the memory will hold only your settings IMPORTANT After specifying the initial settings do not clear the memory again without consulting your Muratec dealer To clear the machine s memory Press Setting 3 0 2 sett ings select item to edit User Data Clear Would vou like to delete 2 If you want to clear the memory press Yes If you do not want to clear the memory press No 1 14 GETTING STARTED Getting started In some countries you are required by law to indicate your name and fax number on every fax you send YOU MUST THEREFORE STORE YOUR NAME OR COMPANY NAME AND FAX NUMBER IN YOUR MACHINE BEFORE USING IT Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of text at the very top of the page This text lists a name called the Transmit Termi nal Identifier TTI and a fax number Under Specifying the initial settings next page you can setup the following items including your name and fax number e Language e Current date and time e Automatic daylight saving time detection e Broadcasting e Phone dial type e Fax reception mode e Dial tone detection e TTI 1 TTI2 TTI3 e Default TTI e Your fax number e Time zone These settings can be changed at any time GETTING STARTED 1 15 GETTING STARTED Specifying the initial settings If you press Reset during the initial setup your machine
222. nt Management Security reception or to mask the PIN you need to set the protect passcode in advance No report You requested an activity journal or transmit confirmation report but your machine has no record of any fax jobs occurring No Toner Cartridge The toner cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in your machine Please properly install the toner cartridge Not enough memory The machine cannot store documents into memory any more Delete unnecessary docu ments stored or wait until a reserved job is done MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Not registered You pressed a key which is not programmed with any command You tried to delete a non registered item Non registered items cannot be deleted Nothing has been You tried to press Enter when nothing has been selected To change the settings or to selected select destinations first select items from the list then press Enter Nothing has been You tried to display the jobs in queue when there is no job stored n Open amp Close Scanner A document has jammed in the ADF Follow the instruction on the display and removed Cover the jammed document Reset your document Open front Cover Open the front cover The cover position is located on the display Paper Count Error The scanned page numbers for the first side and the back side of the documents did not match Fan the document to prevent more than one sheet being drawnthrough at a time
223. nt settings ssesserrrrresrrrrrrrrrrrrssse 12 11 Paper SOE OS eine 12 14 Accessing the paper settings c ccccccssssssccessssssescessssessceeeeeaes 12 14 Machine setting menu By pressing Setting on the control panel you can see the machine setting menu Settings select item to edit Book Entry Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings User 12 2 MACHINE SETTINGS Copy settings The copy settings allow you to customize various copy settings to match your needs Accessing the copy settings Press Setting Copy Settings settings select item to edit Book Entry settings Settings Aaa settings Settings Settings EA 2 Set or change the selected items Copy Settings Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Auto Normal OFF For details on each setting refer to the following table 3 When you are finished press Reset to return to the standby mode The underlined settings are factory defaults Doc Type This sets the default setting for the resolution of the document Text Auto Photo Text High Res to be copied Matching the settings to the frequently copied Text amp Photo High Res Photo High Res documents can shorten the time required to adjust settings Contrast This sets the default setting for the contrast of the document Lightest Lighter Normal Darker Darkest to be copied Matching the settings to the frequently copied docum
224. nt stored in the memory The number of document can be stored in the current operation is full Delete unnecessary documents 14 26 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Scanning errors Suggested solutions Cannot browse a folder file Cannot scan a document Scanned image looks dirty A file name or folder name that contains a special character is not correctly displayed and or cannot open or delete it Check that your browsing folder file is in the same segment with your machine Check that your folder file is under a shared folder that name contains 12 characters of less Check that the link to your browsing folder is 100 characters or less in length Check that the link to your browsing file is 128 characters or less in length Check that the network cable is connected properly Check that the network setting is made up properly Check that the e mail address stored in your address book or the folder FTP shortcut is correct Make sure that the machine is in scan mode If not change to the mode to the scan mode by pressing SCAN The document glass or ADF glass may be dirty Clean the glass see page 14 2 Change the scanning contrast by pressing Contrast Change the scanning resolution by pressing Resolution Change the document type by pressing Doc Typel The code page currently using in your Windows does not compatible with a special characters which can be used in your machine To solve
225. ntered an FTP link you may register it as a shortcut for instant recall Up to 20 shortcuts can be registered After you enter the Link User Name and Password press Shortcut Namel Host Enter the host information and select Enter Shortcut LEIES Link muratec com FIPAY UserName MURATEC 2 Register the Shortcut Namel e Shortcut Name This is the name that will be displayed on the shortcut key The name can contain up to 24 characters If you do not register a name the FTP link will be displayed on the shortcut key When the link is too long to be displayed on the key it will be omitted at the center with and only the beginning and ending of the link will be displayed FIP gt ShortcutName Enter the Shortcut Name and select Enter Entry Limit o 2 Cancel shortcut Name SCANNING 5 45 SCANNING oO 3 Press Enter 4 Press Register Host Enter the host information and select Enter Back J Enter Shortcut Name ay Link muratec comf FTPA UserName MURATEC 5 Select a shortcut number using Page Up and Page Down or the numeric keys You can select either a new number or overwrite a number that has been registered Host Enter the host information and select Enter F range 01 20 gull Would you like to enter 6 Press Yes 7 To return to the standby mode press Reset To edit or delete the shortcut information see Registeri
226. numeric keys e Press Location to review or delete the specified destinations See page 3 26 2 Press Enter U Individual settings 5 1 Press Individual 01 Select item to edit Fress Enter to continue M00 dga Time Always Auto Print OFF 2 Press ON to forward faxes using these transfer rules 01 Select ON OFF and press Enter Individual 3 Press Enter NOTE The default setting is ON However even if ON is selected for the individual setting faxes will not be forwarded until the overall fax forwarding is set to ON 3 54 FAXING O Specified time Specify the time fax forwarding is to be performed If no time is registered faxes will always be forwarded 6 1 Press Time 2 Use the numeric keys to enter the time and date Use the 12 hour format to enter the time Press Week day to insert the day of the week 01 Enter the forwarding time and select Enter start Time End Time Ca ine 3 Press Enter NOTE Press Always to delete the specified time e You can also register either the day or time O Auto print Set Auto print to ON if you want to print the received document before fowarding it 7 1 Press Auto Print 2 Select ON if you want to print the received document in addition to for warding it Select ON OFF and press Enter Auto Print Back Enter 3 Press Enter 8 After registering all the settin
227. o edit Prev 2of 3b Next Journal Line Up OFF Depart Management Security Reception OFF Display Jobs in Queue Copy Protect Ore 2 Use the numeric keys to enter the protect passcode and then press Enter Management Enter the Passcode and select Enter Protect Passcode L 7 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 3 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E 3 1 Select ON to activate security reception and OFF to deactivate it Management Select ON OFF and press Enter Security Reception Back Enter 2 Press Enter 4 If ON was selected in step 3 enter the start time 1 Use A V lt gt or the numeric keys to enter the security reception start time Enter start time for Security Reception and select Enter Start Time Back Enter Hour Minute is 2 Press Enter 5 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 11 4 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE Turning on security reception in real time The machine will enter the security reception mode automatically at the prede termined time If you want to put the machine into the security reception mode in real time you can do this using the following procedure NOTE To enable the following procedure the security reception feature must be active See Activating security reception above Real time security reception Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Others Secur
228. oc Select document and press Enter Command Doc Select document and press Enter Delayed Commands 005 07 09 30am W003 Ca Would you like to print NOTE The selected command document cannot be printed during a real time trans _ mission or polling reception V a Z lt O Oo Z 5 O Z d S 62 O amp Z z S as REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS 6 7 View or print the results of a fax transaction The transaction history can display the past transactions The results for each transaction can be also displayed and printed Press Fax Cancel Job Confirm 2 1 If a document is currently being transmitted the following display will be O I o shown Delayed Commands Select the location to cancel the transmission Communicating 002 02 01 46pm 00 Beth Would you like to delete Otherwise proceed to step 4 2 Press No NOTE Be sure to press No to keep the current transmission If you press Yes the currently transmitting document will be canceled 3 The Delayed Commands list will be displayed Press Enter 4 Press Show History You can check the fax sending receiving history the mail sending history and the mail receiving history respectively 6 8 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS Checking the fax sending receiving history The sending receiving history for the last 100 fax jobs can be displayed 5 Press Show History ewe report T fi
229. od e This manual describes the real time only Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Others Prev or Next Check Mail Fax Functions Select item to edit FPolling F Code Tx OFF OFF OFF OH es Cares JL JL Options Address Subject Batch Scan FileFormat When All tab is selected NOTE You can assign Check Mail to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 4 12 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS Specifying the attachment file format e When sending to a PC the scanned document will be sent as e mail attachment file e Select the attachment format from the following TIFF S TIFF or PDF o TIFF S This form is for ITU T T 37 simple mode The scanned document is converted into A4 size at 200 dpi Select TIFF S when the remote Internet fax machine cannot receive a TIFF o TIFF This form is for ITU T T 37 full mode The scanned document is transmitted in its original scanned parameter TIFF file format is the approved standard for Internet Faxing e PDF PDF is only available when sending to a PC NOTE You can change the default setting for file format See Mail Settings on page _ 12 9 Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others Prev or Next FileFormat 4 1 Select the file format Fax Functions Select the file format and press Enter File Format TIFF 8 TIFF NOTE Color scanning is n
230. ode 3 16 tel ready mode c0ece ees 3 15 Fax settings ccccccccecceseceeceeeees 12 4 File format cccccceceeeee 4 13 5 60 Filename seiesirismernsiinsnerinan 5 6 H Half page reception 66 12 6 Initial settings ceecee 1 16 broadcasting eeecscscccccreseesee 1 18 date amp TIM oases trrawseseuseteoetecosss 1 17 daylight savings 060008 1 18 default TTI cscscssacsoetsecasasbadneus 1 21 dial tone detection 1 20 fax reception mode 1 19 language esscecseesresreerreseesee 1 17 APPENDIX amp INDEX AI 5 p Z 08 a Z eal A Au lt phone dialing type 1 19 time ZONE 00 eeceecceeeceeceeeceeeees 1 22 TTI your name 66 1 20 your fax number 66 1 21 J Journal report Sorting the job Line up 12 12 Journal reports caseccsrscccdsccossendevenes 13 2 L Listo sieseeiie nr 13 2 Loading documents 066 1 25 Loading paper into bypass tray cccceeeee ees 1 29 into paper cassettes 1 27 Location display ccccceeeees 3 26 M Macro KeYS ccccecceseceseceeeeeeees 10 7 Mail history scq artecosessstacoouss 4 4 5 21 Mail settings ceecee 12 9 Maintenance cccccseeceeeeeeeees 14 2 Management settings 12 11 Manual transmission 06 3
231. on and consumable usage LEBEL DQ LEF Macro Program See page 10 7 Programming copy jobs can be tedious especially when you want to customize a job requiring several steps If you regularly perform a job that requires multiple steps you can consolidate these steps into a macro simplifying the process into a one touch operation Copy Fax Department Codes See page 11 13 You can easily track machine usage and restrict machine access by activating the department code feature Once activated the machine will ask for a valid depart ment code prior to access A monetary cost can also be assigned to each job making interoffice billing a snap Duplex Printing See page 7 16 Quickly convert one sided originals into two sided output by utilizing duplex print ing For additional paper and cost savings receive your incoming faxes as two sided PEI LI le EP LI Q IT For duplex printing with F 520 MFX 1430 the optional duplex printing unit is required I 12 Copy Fax Scan Soft Keys See page 10 2 Soft keys allow one touch access to important machine features The keys on the default display are customizable meaning you can set the features you use fre quently onto the default display for easy access Copy Ready esr il Memory 100 This is the screen shown in the F 560 F 520 model Energy Save Mode See page 1 23 Energy Save mode assists in reducing energy consumption and total operat ing costs If th
232. on and select Enter 7 Enter the link to the FTP server The entry can contain up to 100 characters Begin your entry with The slash in found in the Symbol menu To switch back to the alphabet press Alpha Link Enter the Link and select Enter Entry Limit 07100 Cancel 8 Press Enter Q Press User name Enter the host information and select Enter Link muratec comf FTPA Password SCANNING 5 43 SCANNING a 10 Enter the user name using the QWERTY keypad and numeric keys The user name can contain up to 50 characters All ASCII characters are available FIP gt UserName Enter the User Name and select Enter Entry Limit Press Enter 12 Press Password Enter the host information and select Enter Link muratec comf FTAYZ UserName MURATEG Password 13 Enter the password using the QWERTY keyboard and numeric keys The pass word can contain up to 32 characters All ASCII characters are available FIP gt Password Enter the Password and select Enter Entry Limit Of 32 Cancel NOTE The entered password is displayed using asterisks 14 Press Enter 5 44 SCANNING 15 Press Enter Host Enter the host information and select Enter eg ister Back JENS Shortcut Name eer murate com FIPAY UserName MURATEL Password eee Set 16 Press Start Registering an FTP server to a shortcut After you e
233. ons The table below lists the advanced functions that can be used in the Copy mode To select the advanced copy functions Press COPY to display the Copy standby mode 2 Press Others 3 Press the key you want to select Refer to the pages indicated for detailed information NOTE You can assign a function that you frequently use to a soft key for instant recall See pages 10 2 to 10 6 Advanced function Reference Page Use this to set the paper type on the bypass p 1 32 tray Use this to set the magnification for zoom copy p 7 12 Enable or disable the sort copy p 7 13 1 The duplex printing unit is required Duplex Copy is displayed when the duplex printing unit is not installed 2 Card Copy is available from document glass only This function is not available for F 560 F 520 7 10 COPYING Selecting the paper size The machine will automatically select the appropriate paper to match the original document however you can manually specify the paper all well In addition bypass copy is available using the bypass tray Selecting the paper From the display select the cassette containing the paper you want to use for copy ing Copy Ready os Memory 100 Doc Type fg Auto Normally Letter OFFS others e For bypass copy use the following procedure to set the paper type Press Bypass Press Others Bypass for MF X 2030 MFX 1430 model Set 1 Memory 1004 Copy
234. ork via the Ethernet port Installing the driver In order to use your machine as a local or network printer you should have the applicable print driver installed on your PC The drivers are located on the CD supplied with your machine The CD also con tains Local Printer and Scanner Manual and Network Printer Manual please refer to these guides for the installation instructions 9 2 PC PRINTING Printing a document from the PC After the network or local print driver is installed on your PC you can printout documents from virtually any PC application The following steps describe the typical process when printing documents out of Windows based applications The exact process may vary depending on the applica tion you are using Verify that your machine is properly connected to the computer the power has been turned on and the cassette is full of paper 9 Verify that you have installed the print driver on your computer 3 Start the desired application program and create open a document 4 Click Print or Print Setup from the File menu Make sure that Muratec is selected as the printer indicates your machine s model name ex Muratec F 520 If you want to make any adjustments click Properties or Setup 5 Click OK or Print to start the print job NOTE For more information on printing refer to the Local Printer and Scanner Manual and Network Printer Manual on t
235. ormation on entering characters refer to pages 1 10 to 1 13 Enter ing characters There are several other ways in which to enter an e mail address e Select an Address Book entry See page 5 11 to 5 15 e LDAP directory search See pages 5 15 to 5 19 e E mail history See pages 5 21 to 5 22 e Re mail See page 5 22 If you select a destination from the Address Book the machine will begin scan ning as soon as the destination is selected Otherwise proceed to step 8 If you have selected multiple destinations and would like to review them see page 5 23 Otherwise proceed to step 8 8 Press Start Registering the entered e mail address to the address book 5 10 If you entered an e mail address and wish to register it into your machine side address book please follow these steps After you have entered the e mail address press Register Mail Address Enter the recipient s e mail address and select Enter Entry Limit 157 50 e mail ken muratec com 2 Select an address book entry number using A V or the numeric keys You cannot select a number that has been registered Enter the recipient s e mail address and select Enter Entry Limit 157 50 Input range 001 300 dn 5 Would you like to register 3 Press Yes SCANNING 4 Enter the Name Fax No or Group information as needed The Name field must be registered For more information how to enter them see Regitering or
236. ortcut name then press Enter The name can contain up to 24 characters If you do not register a shortcut name the folder link will be displayed on the shortcut key When the link is too long to be displayed on the key it will be omitted at the center with and only the beginning and ending of the link will be displayed Folder gt Shortcut Name Enter the Shortcut Name and select Enter Entry Limit af 24 Cancel shortcut Name s Shared_ Cancel e To finish without registering the shortcut press Cancel e To return to the screen in step 4 press Back 8 To return to the standby mode press Reset To edit or delete the shortcut information see Resitering or editing a folder shortcut on pages 5 35 to 5 41 5 32 SCANNING Scanning documents using a folder shortcut NOTE The folders should be registered in advance For more information see Resiter ing or editing a folder shortcut on pages 5 35 to 5 41 NOTE Scanning will begin once the shortcut key has been pressed If you want to scan to multiple folder shortcuts select Broadcast prior to destination selection Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press Folder 4 Select the desired shortcut key on the display If it is not displayed press Page Up or Page Down Scan Ready Memory 100 others j mai 1 Folder SCANNING 5 33 SCANNING a Reviewing or canceling selected folders You can quic
237. ot compatible with Internet faxing For details on color scan ning see Scan to e mail on page 5 9 2 Press Enter twice INTERNET F AX FUNCTIONS 4 13 INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS 4 14 5 Enter the e mail address You can specify it using the address book or by entering it manually e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page 3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Select Location to confirm delete recipient To E004 Beth Chicago Office be eet WSearchil Index Location orma lig AIA002 Mike London Office t IO03 Carl Paris Office tail k aan i ddress B ee arab anette el Mai E005 Chane Beliing Office History J Others Press Reset to cancel the settings 6 Press Start If you specify the destination using the address book no need to press Start INTERNET FAX FUNCTIONS Chapter Scanning POLO OSC MN acesienscissyosvoce tance E E N 5 2 TS OFAN T o i PARRE PE AE E A E A E T E E ET 5 2 ONY A Doei E O 5 3 TOC UMC DLEA i 00 AE E EE E E O EA A 5 4 EE 1G PE EEA AEA EAEE A TE 5 5 Entorno the file NaMe ssannnannrnnaan 5 6 SCAO C eE E E caseasuvaseeneseeseceiauaecaiaes 5 9 Sending a document by e mail sseeesssssssersesrrrrssssrererssrrerrsserrresssrrees 5 9 Selecting a destination from the Address Book ccc0000 5 11 Searching for an e mail address cccccccccccesssscseesssseeeceesseees 5 15
238. ows the alternative binding type of the duplex document A STMT TTS Top binding Right amp Left binding Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail Folder or FTP 4 Press Others 5 Press DuplexScan SCANNING oO NOTE You can assign DuplexScan to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 6 Select ON Scan Functions Select ON OFF and press Enter Duplex Scan a Z Manually scan both sides of a document prior to job execution 7 Press Advance Scan Functions Select ON OFF and press Enter Duplex Scan idvance OFF Manually scan both sides of a document prior to job execution SCANNING 5 61 8 Press Bind Right amp Left Duplex Scan Select Enter to save the setting Select Back to cancel the function Doc Direction O Select the binding position that suits your document Duplex Scan Select the document bind position and press Enter Bind sehen 10 Press Enter three times Select the desired destination 12 Press Start 13 After the first side has been scanned remove the document s from the output tray and insert them in the same direction as before Set duplex document JEt Guplex doc sep 26 2005 04 20pm Memory og Autolg ae Next Loading Direction Norma lg 14 Press Start either using the key on the control panel or on the display The machine will automatically sort the documen
239. panel 3 Press e mail 4 Press Index Scan Ready sep 26 2005 05 44pm Resolutionig 200dpi Search 01 Sam K New York Office F 4 002 Mike M London Office E003 Carl M Paris Office 004 Beth W Chicaga Office 7 E005 Chang K Beijing Offic 5 Select the corresponding button that contains the first letter of the name If the destination begins with a symbol select Symbol To view the contacts by their Address Book number select Numeric select the Address Book search category 5 12 SCANNING 6 The entries will now be displayed based on your selection If you have multiple contacts registered use the Page Up and Page Down to toggle through the directory Scan Ready sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 1003 mere 7 Select the desired destination s Using Group If you regularly send the same document to multiple parties you can utilize the group function to automatically select these users Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail 4 Press Index 5 Press Group Index Select the Address Book search category SCANNING 5 13 SCANNING oO 6 Select the desired group s You can even choose Non Group Members to select a destination that is not associated with a group Group select the group you want to send to Non Group Members Cancel o Group Oif S Group DA Group 03 5 Group OMH S_Group 0S b _bGroup Ub S Group OA 8 Group
240. phone rings pick up the handset e When you hear the fax tones beep beep beep pick up the handset and press Start After pressing Start put down the optional handset or the external phone s handset Press Start as soon as you hear the beeping sound this will prompt the remote machine to begin transmitting If paper runs out during fax reception When your machine runs out of paper it will beep the Alarm lamp will light and the machine will show which paper source is empty the 1st cassette 2nd cassette optional or the bypass tray Load paper for reception Load paper into the 1st OFFI 3 When paper runs out in the 1st cassette FAXING 3 17 Out of paper reception If your machine runs out of paper it can store up to 250 fax receptions in its memory This is called out of paper reception Once you refill the paper supply the machine will automatically print the messages stored in memory NOTE The number of pages not receptions your fax machine can store for out of paper reception will vary It depends on e Your machine s memory capacity e Types of documents sent to your machine e Fax resolution of the documents sent to your machine Checking the out of paper reception copy print queue The out of paper reception print queue status can be checked Press Setting 2 Press Management 3 1 Press Next 2 Press Display Jobs in Queue Management select item to edit
241. power consumption 1 Numeric keys Use these keys to enter numerical values such as fax phone numbers 12 Start Executes the operation 13 Stop Stops the machine s operation To stop a fax transmission press Fax Cancel Job Confirm 14 Fax Cancel Job Confirm Press this to cancel or review stored jobs or to review the results of a communication GETTING STARTED 1 3 GETTING STARTED Operating tips Changing modes You can switch to the Copy Fax or Scan standby mode by pressing the mode keys NOTE You cannot switch the mode in any of the following cases e While scanning a document e During a real time transmission Operating the display To select a function or to set a setting lightly touch the desired function or setting shown on the display CAUTION Never push down on the display with force and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the display Display description You can directly touch keys on the control panel for machine operation Functions and values can be changed by touching the keys or tabs shown on the display Copy standby mode Message Area Number of sets PS e mory Memory Indicator Doc Type ff Autoly Norma li Letter 1004 Sart Main Unit Icon Message Area Displays the machine s current status operation instructions error messages and other information Number of sets Indicates the print quantity entered from the control panel Memo
242. press Enter Rx Protect Back Enter SPECIAL FEATURES 10 27 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O U Setting auto print 1 Press Auto Print o If ON has been selected for auto print documents received in the bulletin box will be printed automatically when it is received 2 Select either ON or OFF then press Enter Bulletin Box Select ON OFF and press Enter Auto Print Back Enter O Setting overwrite 1 Press OverWrite e If you set the overwrite function to ON newly received documents will over write documents previously stored in memory 2 Select either ON or OFF then press Enter Bulletin Box Select ON OFF and press Enter Overlrite 10 28 SPECIAL FEATURES O Setting deletion of documents after transmission 1 Press Prev or Next then press Erase Tx Doc e When Erase Tx Doc has been set to ON the machine erases the document from the box as soon as it sends it 2 Select either ON or OFF then press Enter Bulletin Box Select ON OFF and press Enter Erase Tx Doc Back Enter O Entering an I D code 1 Press I D Code e You do not always need to register the I D code Once you register it how ever entering the I D code is required in the following cases e When editing the box settings e When storing documents in the box e When printing the document stored in the box e Once entered the I D code cannot be viewed Be sure to remember
243. r 123456 18_ CEED 6 Press Enter Performing a batch transmission while using the PIN mask If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and use Batch Transmission See page 3 35 you must store the PIN access code for the remote machine within the appropriate batch box Follow the steps for registering or editing a batch box See page 3 35 The display will ask for the fax number 2 Use the numeric keys to enter the fax number for the batch transmission Batch Tx Enter the recipient s fax number and select Enter Fax Number 12233_ eer JC Pause Tone Prefix NOTE When using Mode 2 you cannot specify the destination using the address book Even if the number you want to register in the batch transmission has been registered in the address book use the numeric keys to enter the destination according to the procedure When using Mode 1 if the destination was specified using the address book proceed to step 4 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 11 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E 3 Enter star and enter the PIN number Batch Tx Enter the recipient s fax number and select Enter Fax Number Back Enter 12233 5 5555 _ Pause Prefix 4 Press Enter to save the setting Now you can perform a batch transmission with the PIN masking feature activated Press Reset to return to the standby mode 11 12 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE Department management When t
244. r Enter Edit select the box number to enter edit Prev lof 4b Next 3 Select the type of F code box 01 select box type Bulletin 4 Refer to pages 10 23 through 10 29 for the registration method 10 22 SPECIAL FEATURES O If you setup a Security box 5 Press Secure Box 6 Use the numeric keys to enter the sub address This is the numerical identifier you must enter in order to communicate with any remote F code compatible fax e Up to 20 digits can be entered for sub addresses Numerals can be entered o If the number is incorrect press Clear to erase it then re enter the number correctly 01 Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub address and select Enter 0123456 83_ lt e ccs 7 Press Enter 8 Use the numeric keys to enter the I D code 4 digits e The I D code is required to retrieve documents in the security box or to edit the box settings e The I D code cannot be viewed after it is entered be sure to remember this code 01 Enter D Coderpassword LD Code S pak C crs Q Press Enter SPECIAL FEATURES 10 28 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O 10 Enter the box name 1 Press Box Name Secure Box select item to edit Bos Name Sub ddress 01234566709 HoldT ime 0 Day 0 Code AEE E E 2 Enter the box name e The name can contain up to 16 characters e For details on character entry see Entering characters on page
245. r may not be installed properly Reinstall the printer driver Muratec Color TWAIN Scanner The TWAIN driver may not be installed properly does not appear in the list of the Reinstall the printer driver available scanner device on your application software Scanned image looks dirty e The document glass or ADF glass may be dirty Clean the glass see page 14 2 e Change the scanning contrast by pressing Contrast e Change the scanning resolution by pressing Resolution e Change the document type by pressing Doc Type Tn order to use your machine as a local scanner you should have the driver installed from CD supplied with your machine MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 29 Print quality problems Pages are blank Pages are black Printouts are too light Printouts are too dark Printouts have a blurred background Printouts are of uneven density Printouts have irregularities The document is loaded incorrectly Set the document facing up on the ADF or facing down on the document glass The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage If the problem persists replace the toner cartridge The drum charge wire may be dirty Open the front cover To clean the drum charge wire pull the blue rod toward you making sure it fully extends Then return the rod to its original position See page 14 4 T
246. r the remote person s voice adjust the receiver volume to one of three settings High Medium or Low Receiver Volume Ringer Volume USING THE ADDRESS Book Adjusting the speaker volume Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Fax tab 3 Press Monitor Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Memory 100 E earch ddrEdit Orma 193 001 Sam New York Office Page 002 Mike London Office 003 Carl Paris Office 2 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK BiGearch Add Edit Vj E00 San New York Office Fa R002 Mike London Office 0 A i 3 i E004 Beth Chicago Office Down 5 Select the desired volume and press Enter Tel Mode Select the volume and press Enter Volume Setting Back JEnter OFF Low Middle 6 Press Monitor to hang up USING THE ADDRESS Book 2 21 2 22 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK Chapter E OaE IDE D At e PP ES EEE E A P E EE 3 2 Document handling ssseessesseessessrrssssrerrsssrrersssrrerrsssrrerssereresssrrreessens 3 2 Scanning resolution esseesesesseresssrerssserrerssererrsserreressreerssserereesssreees 3 2 Scanning contrast eesssseesssssreressrrerssserreessereresssrreeessrreeessereeesssree 3 3 Sendin meod aeeoe e E EE 3 3 Memory overflow MeSSage cccccccccsssssscccssssessccsssssesccessssseeccessaees 3 4 OTA N i o PRE E ENAN E A E E 3 5 Memory transmisso iiesrarr anen serene sasseeseeereieeeenanceeerans 3 5 Real time transmission non
247. r when you per form a broadcast transmission e Sample of the document An reduced image of the first page of the docu ment will appear To activate the transmission confirmation report Press Setting Fax Settings Default Settings Tx Report Default Settings select item to edit Enter Normal Normal ON ON OFF OFF OFF 2 When you want to set the transmission confirmation report set it to ON ON and OFF toggle every time you press Tx Report NOTE When you want to temporarily change the transmission confirmation report setting perform the following procedure After the transmission has been completed the Tx Report setting will return to the default setting 1 Press FAX Others 2 Press Tx Report to change the setting ON and OFF toggle every time you press Tx Report 3 Press Enter e You can assign Tx Report to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 13 8 REPORT amp LISTS Stored document list Your machine can print a list of documents stored in memory It will tell you how much memory each document is using The list information includes e Type The document type such as Tx Doc e Data in Kbyte How much memory is used for the document e Page Number of pages e Note Other information such as the command number To print the list of documents stored in memory Press Setting List Settings List Store Doc List then Yes
248. racters when registering the address book The chart below briefly describes each of these characters Each pause lasts two seconds If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dial ing sequence enter a pause You can change the pause length See page 12 6 a Makes long numbers easier to be read Switches from pulse dialing to tone dialing No need to use this character when using a tone line Enters a Dial prefix code to access the alternative telephone network N must be entered before the first of number USING THE ADDRESS Book ao USING THE ADDRESS BOOK Registering destinations in Address Book Registering or editing a destination Your machine can store up to 300 destinations in the Address Book Each destina tions are designated by a three digit identifier code 001 through 300 Press Setting 2 Press Address Book Entry settings select item to edit i Ss Paper store Doc Settings Settings Settings Settings User 3 Press Enter Edit Address Book Entry select item to edit Enter Edit 4 Press the address book number you want to register or edit Enter Edit select a number to enter edit d001 Sam New York Office do O002 MikefLondon Office When registering an empty destination the QWERTY keypad will be shown and the destination name must be registered To edit the destination name press Name and edit the name 2 4 USI
249. re roller surface FF VAS Si F YJ NA Zz a Vj Cleaning the drum charge wire and the print head When the following message appears on the display or if you are experiencing poor print quality the charge wire needs to be cleaned Open Front Cover Follow Instruction amp NOTE Your machine will print approximately 100 pages after this message appears after the maximum number of prints has been reached the machine will display a Printer Not Usable message and will not allow any further print jobs to take place This will prevent your machine from becoming permanently damaged MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 3 g MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Aas To clean the charge wire Open the front cover Gently pull the blue cleaning rod toward you making sure it fully extends Then return the rod to its original position This operation also cleans the print head Instruction A Pull the blue rod toward you making sure it fully extends Return the rod to its original position 3 Close the front cover 14 4 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner runs out your machine will show Toner should be replaced on the display and it will not print until the toner cartridge is replaced To replace the toner cartridge Open the front cover 2 Turn the toner cartridge locking lever to the left unlock positio
250. reerrrserrrersssrrreesssene 5 47 Reviewing or canceling selected FTP servers cccccccccessssssecceeessssseeeceeessseeesceseeeaes 5 48 Registering or editing an FTP server Shortcut sseesseessssserresssrrerrssssreeessssrreessssrreresss 5 49 Advanced functions ssseeeseesssessssreesrerssseessrtesereesrersseressrressreesseesseresseresseressresseressrresseeeseres 5 56 OOF EEE ET ET E E PEE EE E A A T O 5 56 IA a a PEIEE AAE E E NE E N N ES 5 57 TO UC E rE o a E A AE AE AAA A AIEA T ET 5 59 Selecting the file format ssccacudanasdiaantactainndcandeavastaccslacdesueantuntadwadsootsinaeiecntasasoadslacsinlad eoes 5 60 Daph aE aa E O E E E E 5 61 TOPO C AS na orr R wneanaascnasansautanssnataasaee 5 63 Attaching additional files to the scanned document cccccccccessssccessssseceesseeeeseees 5 64 Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commandsS ssssseeeeccsoccecessoccccecccooecceccooccccecoocececoooococecoooocececoceceeeeooe 6 1 Reviewing or canceling commands sssssersessssseessssreresssrrereessereeresssrreessssereressssrereeserereeesee 6 2 To review or cancel a command csssccesessecceesssceecessseeecesseecesesseeceseseeceeeeseeecessaeeeeens 6 2 Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast eeseeeeseesssesrreessssrererssrreerssssrreersserrreesssres 6 4 Printing a delayed command list ssssseesseesereeessseersssseressssssereesssrrereessrreeessssrreessserereesssees 6 6 Printing a stored document see
251. report Rx 6 The fax sending receiving history will be displayed 7 Select the transaction you want to display The transaction results will be displayed Prev 4 tof 13m Next 8 Press Yes to print the transaction results Show History a eee Would you like to print O32 TX Beth W Chicaga offic Resolution Normal Start Time 05 03 10 05am Time cay eae Page Result Ok NOTE Regarding the error code in Result column see Error codes on pages 14 24 to 14 25 e In fax transaction results Tx Result will be printed for fax transmissions and Rx Result will be printed for fax receptions REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS 6 9 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS Checking the mail sending history The transmission history for the last 50 Internet faxes and scan to e mails can be displayed 5 Press Mail report Tx Mai Mai History Gaia report Ks 6 The mail transmission history will be displayed 7 Select the transaction you want to display The transaction result is displayed Mail report Tx Enter 8 Press Yes to print the transaction results Mail report Tx Would vou like to print O1 jsmith acmebrick com Subject Today s schedule Date 05 05 02 00pm TotalLocations Result NOTE Regarding the error code in Result column see Error codes on pages 14 24 to 14 25 6 10 REVIEWING OR CANCELING COMMANDS Checking
252. ress book item to enter edit Fax No 1 561 684d 65168 Group S_Group O1 5_Group 03 5_ Group U6 Group S_Group U1 5_Group 03 5 Group Ub 5 Press Yes to delete 001 Sam New York Office select the address book item to enter edit dy001 Sam New York Office Would you like to delete Press No to return to step 4 without deleting the number USING THE ADDRESS Book 2 11 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK N How to dial using the address book Sending a fax or e mail using the address book Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the document resolution and contrast if necessary 4 1 Select the tab that contains the destination you want to send to Fay Re ady Fax Ready Mode sep 2b Memory 100 reso onl Search Add Edit OFMma 193 conta A001 Sam New York Office F Normal 4 O01 Sam New York Office Broadcast jg COFFE History When All tab is selected 2 Press Page Up or Page Down to display the specified destination 3 Press the desired destination Alternatives Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the document resolution and contrast if necessary 4 Press Others 5 Press Address Book NOTE You can assign Address Book to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 2 12 USING THE ADDRESS BOOK 6 1 Use A V or the numeric keys to enter the address book number 001 to 300 Fax Fu
253. rn to the standby mode Registering department codes You can register up to 100 department codes Press Setting Management Next Depart Management Enter Edit 2 Select the department code you want to register e Press 001 for the first entry e To edit the name and number of a department already registered select the number you want to edit Enter Edit Select a number to enteredit 11 14 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 3 Enter the department code using A V or the numeric keys and then press Enter Up to 9 digits can be entered Enter Edit Enter the department code and select Enter Department Code Back Jj Enter Input range QUQU00000 3999999954 a 000000110 oi 4 Press Department Name to register the department name 001 000000110 select item to edit Department Code 000000110 Department Name 5 Enter the department name and then press Enter e The department name can contain up to 20 characters For details on charac ter entry see page 1 10 Department Name Enter the department name and select Enter Entry Limit 14 20 Department Name Domestic Sal 6 The list will be displayed and all registered data will appear RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E 7 To register another department code press Enter and repeat the procedures from step 2 Press Reset to return to the standby mode RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 15
254. rol panel 2 Press Mail Settings 3 Press Subject 4 Press ON then Enter 5 Select the desired template and press Enter Mai settings Select the default e mail template and select Enter Template E dl uto Subject Text z Auto Subject O1 News Rel z Notification 03 Cofidential 6 To return to the standby mode press Reset SCANNING 5 27 SCANNING oO Scan to folder Scanning documents into a folder You can scan a document directly into a network folder NOTE To save a scanned document to a folder you should have a shared folder in your computer Create a shared folder in advance referring to your PC manual if necessary Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press Folder 5 Select Scan Destination sep 26 2005 02 15pm Memory 100 Adjust the scan settings or set advanced functions For more information about those functions see Before scanning on pages 5 2 to 5 8 and Advanced functions on pages 5 56 to 5 66 Press Browse The Network Navigation screen will be displayed Scan Ready pep 26 200d 12 00am Memory 100 pesolut ion Browse Add Ed it co ijg same Folder NOTE The following folders will not be browsed from your machine e Folders that are not in the same segment with your machine e Folders that name contain 13 or more characters e Folders that link contain more than 100 characters i
255. rrssssrrrssssersssssrreresereressssrereesrreresssrreesssees 14 2 Cleaning the scanning area ssseseessssseerrserrrrrsserrrrrsererrrssrreressees 14 2 Cleaning the ADF cn ie c g eee ene een ee nen eens 14 3 Cleaning the drum charge wire and the print head 14 3 Replacing the toner CALC 2 C vicscciscscedarivcassscesaccumtareneciuGnnsanssorastane 14 5 Replacing the drum cartridge as sete oc casuicrusadiaenshednasevaansevsssviceasbabass 14 7 Troubleshoot ini sac aesicieaseed ccocabesane terrors oncesesacadaoconadacsessnsuneteriteedabianeiene 14 9 Pocument JANIS oe aenn e n E EE E qvecentesss 14 9 Paper JanS eeni EEE TET 14 13 Displayed error INCE SAO CS gency geaosdecasasanseccrsenectannasienseuacssnsoctaeen 14 16 Check Message PFINLOULG os Scccivereeiiweninscenesiecesandavelatonndeneiecnaees 14 23 PE OF COGIC AE E E A EA ETE EEEE EE 14 24 Machine errog rcaovssahcescaedousaseanavnereaninseeseustentacsecrusseeneeateneatanieds 14 26 Pno ETON e N AT EE E 14 26 C OT 6 reaa er A AAAA NERT 14 27 CODY E O TO renen aE EEE E E 14 27 PC printing errofS eeeesessssseressssrersssrersssssrereserreressereeeesrreeesserreeese 14 27 Local Scanner errorS esessssesesseresssereesseresseressseressseeesseressseresss 14 28 Printguality problems sienen 14 29 If you cannot solve the problem ssesssssesesseressserersseressererssereess 14 31 Maintenance Cleaning tips To obtain optimal machine performance please follow these guid
256. rting the Machine If you need to transport the machine over a long distance consult your Muratec dealer Storing and handling the toner and drum cartridges To avoid damage to your machine and to assure the best performance possible follow these guidelines when storing and handling the toner and drum cartridges Use supplies manufactured specifically for Muratec machines Using toner and drum cartridges or other supplies that are not manufactured specifically for your machine may affect the operation of your machine Storing the cartridges Store the cartridges in a location that meets the following requirements e Free from direct sunlight e Away from dusty conditions e Away from floppy disks or other computer media computer displays or other materials sensitive to magnetic fields e Away from high humidity e Do not stand the cartridge on its end and do not store it upside down Do not open the protective bag containing the cartridge until you are ready to install the cartridge I 8 Cartridge handling Do not burn toner cartridges Toner powder is extremely flammable Exposure to flame can cause the toner cartridge to burn or explode causing serious injury e Keep cartridges away from water and oil e Do not expose cartridges to direct sunlight e Do not subject cartridges to static or electrical shock CAUTION Be careful not to get the toner powder in your eyes If toner powder gets in your eyes immediately fl
257. ry Indicates the remaining memory available for the next opera Indicator tion Main Unit Icon Displays the status of the main unit This can also be used to select the cassette bypass tray for a copy job Soft Keys Displays five functions frequently used You can assign other functions to soft key according your needs See Soft key on page 10 2 Press this to display the various copy functions 1 4 GETTING STARTED Fax standby mode Fay R aa d y ae Standby Status Fax Ready r Sep 26 2005 0z 165p emorw 100 ResolutionB Searchllll index Add Edit Reso ut orfiear cif Index Aaaredi Tontrast VA H001 Sam New York Office lp ry Time Display and Memory 001 San New York Office Broadcast OFF Soft Keys History Others Address Book Name Function Message Area Displays the machine s current status operation instructions error messages and other information Standby Status Displays the fax reception mode Time Display __ Displays the current date time and amount of fax memory and Memory available Address Book Displays the registered destinations Soft Keys Displays five functions frequently used You can assign other functions to soft key according your needs See Soft key on page 10 2 Others Press this to display the various fax functions Search Press this to search the destination from your Address Book or your LDAP server Index Displays the destinations in alphabetical or
258. s Enter Press Reset to reset the sending settings RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 11 17 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE E Making Copies Set the document See page 1 25 2 Press COPY to display the Copy standby mode 3 Use A YV or the numeric keys to enter the department code If you press Back the department code entry display will disappear Press Start to display it again Set Enter the department code and select Enter Depart Management Input range UUQUU0000 3999999994 a 000000000 E 4 Press Enter 5 Press Start If you continue to make copies you do not need to enter the department code If you select Reset and return to the standby mode you will be asked to enter the department code again If the machine is shared by multiple departments select Reset after you have completed your job 11 18 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE Printing a list of department management settings The department management list includes the following information for each department NOTE e Copy charge page e Department code e Department name e Total communication time in hours minutes and seconds h mm ss Counts the communication time up to 999 59 59 999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds If the fax exceeds the maximum time it will stop counting e Total fax pages printed Counts the pages up to 999999 pages If the fax count exceeds the maximum limit it will stop counting e Total
259. s the following features e Security reception e PIN masking e Department code protection To set the passcode Press Setting Management Next Protect Passcodel 2 1 Enter the four digit number To change or delete the protect passcode enter the four digit number already registered Management Enter protect code then push Enter Protect Passcode L C ccs Enter 0000 to delete Passcode 2 Press Enter The passcode has been registered Press Reset to return to the standby mode To change or delete the protect passcode proceed to step 3 3 1 To change the protect passcode enter a new four digit code To delete the protect passcode enter 0000 2 Press Enter Press Reset to return to the standby mode NOTE Write down the passcord and put it in a safe place 11 2 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE Security reception Security reception tells your machine to keep all received faxes in memory but not print them You can print them out later at your convenience This feature assists with HIPPA compliance NOTE To use this feature you must activate the passcode protection feature as described on page 11 2 When protect passcode is OFF security reception will not be available Activating security reception Press Setting Management Next Security Reception e You need to register the protect passcode in advance See page 11 2 Management select item t
260. scccessssssccessssseecessssseesceeesaees 2 3 Registering destinations in Address Book ccccccsssssceeeessseeeeeesnees 2 4 Registering or editing a destination ccccccccsssssssccesssseseeeeseees 2 4 Alternative 1 Registering or editing directly into the address book 2 7 Alternative 2 Registering or editing the fax number using the numeric keys 2 8 Alternative 3 Registering an e mail address using the QWERTY keypad 2 9 Deleting a destination s deosaccasccnsavspanceavivennchtneasueatsisecsaneneaawauacncnienss 2 10 Alternative Deleting directly from the address book 2 11 How to dial using the address ook ccccccccccessssssceeesssseeeeeens 2 12 Calleroup dali senenn Oreo oe nn 2 14 Registering OF editing a call STOUP scrsecssidscevesdecswsnsssaceederawastsscususs 2 14 Deleting a call OT OUD anc cccadonsestecsdiasavansescactmestesteencetnstedatieesacdexatends 2 15 How to dial using a call OrOUp iss versssusecusseeicoodderisncdwsnesiowneensaiedys 2 16 Makanga phone call eener renn EEE EE 2 19 How to dial using the address ook cccccccccssssssceessssseeeeeens 2 19 If the call fails o secasuscaceasacesestoneoseasnedataadecectaxaeestategceasandesaratedeentataees 2 20 How to receive a phone call eeseseesseesessserssssreressssrersssrreresserreesse 2 20 Adjusting the optional handset volume eesssccserrreserreressee 2 20 Adjusting the speaker Volume ccccccccccsssss
261. scctiecineneteenienscterexs 6 6 Printing a stored document xercasssecorcrstseniannaesdscicesesserasveseuniaaaesies 6 6 View or print the results of a fax transaction seeseseeesereeseresse 6 8 Reviewing or canceling commands Your machine can store several Jobs in memory It also keeps track of each com mand by assigning it a command number like 001 Delayed commands redial attempts and current transactions are all stored in your machine s memory and given a command number Your machine can store up to 100 delayed commands It identifies each by a three digit command number from 001 to 100 The Review Commands function gives you the power to check on each job or command in your machine s memory It also allows you to cancel a fax and e mail transmission command To review or cancel a command The operation differs depending on whether or not a document is currently being transmitted D Press Fax Cancel Job Confirm O If your machine is attempting to perform a command proceed to step 5 Io NOTE For details on canceling the group transmission and or broadcast trans mission in progress refer to Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast on page 6 4 2 Press Delayed Commands Review Commands Delayed Commands History 3 The currently stored command will be displayed Delayed Commands select the location to cancel the transmission Delayed Commands 001 10 09 00am W001
262. seeeecesseeaes 3 20 Friant setings oenn ET ES 3 20 Advanced fax functions cccccccsscccessscccssscccesseecessceccesseecesseeceeseeecesseeceeseeceesseeceesseceseeeeenas 3 23 POMOC AU OO rossore eon er aE OOE AE E E E NA ERAN E ANENE REE aa EA EAEAN SS 3 24 Pe O a E E O EE N AAA 3 28 Sending faxes with TTI information attached seeeseeeesseeseessesserrssssrrerrerssrrrersssrrreessssns 3 30 OO A a E E E NE 3 32 Delayed trans missio ices snasnccsnasanananstaudatacessanonssacsibesaacaiandaeseuseiaabidausasanesbesansanzonyseatadsente 3 34 Pateh tirans GN 1 SOI dave sacagcscey ses conedetuse ai EE EET 3 35 Specifying the document SCANNING SZC ccesescceeeesssceccceessssceccccessseeeeeeeessseeeseeeeeeaes 3 41 Poling transmission eee eee ae One Re ne ee ene nn ee ee ee eee ae 3 42 Overseas transmission ge eatscecc conan neosanesstsenseseciotandactshautouandecuetssaasdeceseiacsensnaanaaueoteakaa ead 3 43 Using an alternative telephone network service provider Dial prefix eccess 3 44 Block junk TAK seeeseseeseseesessseesssssrersssssrerrsssrreereserreressssreressssreeeessreetessseteeessseeeeesssreeeesse 3 46 Polno receptio sanarsan AENA 3 50 Faz forward no onan EE RE 3 51 Separator page ea ctac beavers inay toneetaecteemad suc tietwns sttt ttt cue taneanedeiaeasoutenaag ese tacestendutacteonaauns 3 57 Chapter 4 Miternet Fax fonction S csiccerscssssversasveedevstascucviinsvuvessvestoniovssavvastsvsanieasianisraceniattotiontiainnsnieanns 4 1 D
263. sencotestontons 2 10 Alternative Deleting directly from the address book ccccccccssscccessssssceessseeeeseens 2 11 How to dial using the address b00k cccccssscsccessssscccccessssseecccessssseeeceeesseeeeceeseeaes 2 12 Call group I ess racceresteance seater nana E Eaa EEE REE dou EIER i 2 14 Registering or editing a call group seesessessserssssssreessssreressssrerresssrreressssreeesssereeessssreeeesse 2 14 Deleting a call group sseessseseessseressssrerrssssreeresssrrresssssreressssreeeessereeeesseereeesssereeeesssreeeesse 2 15 How to dial usine acall oron eeir a 2 16 Makine a phone Call seserian e RA iA aiis 2 19 How to dial using the address book eeseeseeeesessseessssssersssssrerresssrreressssreeessssreessssreeeesse 2 19 BTU Ca TAME n TE A 2 20 How to receive a phone 218 62 pment one eee er ee 2 20 Adjusting the optional handset Volume ccccccccccesssssseccceeesssceeeceessseesecesseseeeeeeess 2 20 Adjusting the speaker VOLE ccsnsissnscncnsaadnacacnssboastnseaneistpesacassooectanssaiunstaoncnaiaaniiaaaoagens 2 21 Chapter 3 ATG EEEE E E A T E A EE EE E A A E REE 3 1 Before sending lt a een En er One ee enn ee 3 2 Document handling susuriin e i nn aad EEEE Eaa SN NT aiai 3 2 Scanning CO SO MILO Gl sessie ierni nrisiarisri Nans rnn ESEE NEE EAE NENIE O NEon NE EN E EE ATAN iN i 3 2 CE COE E E E 3 3 PO FVII MENO oaa aA A Era R 3 3 M mory overflow MESSAGE sosisini ideni NEEE E 3 4 aE a A a E A esse
264. seserresessseesssssrressssereresssrreeeessereeeesseereesssee 10 31 Printing stored documents eeesessssessrrrsssssrrresserrersssssreressssrereessereeresserreesssssreeeesssreeeee 10 33 Deleting stored documents seesssesrrrssssseeresssrrersssssreressssrereessrreeressereresssesreeeessereeeee 10 35 Sending a document using a subaddress and password eeeesssseeserreresrrrressserresssss 10 37 Polling a document using a subaddress and password eesssesserrseersrerrsssrrrerssereree 10 38 Viewing the COU NU CS ooro N E 10 39 Checking the number of printed pages ccccccccccssssssscccesssssseecccessssseeeceeessseeeeeeeeens 10 39 Chapter 11 Restrictine USE of the THACIING sisri i aaa 11 1 Security features a canecnaetuteesciotancensmorseenumtoseeauindsandtsmoctieanautacdueapentuateteodsavuteasemeutacsucend daseendseets 11 2 Passcode PEO ECC UON secsatcsvesccunitedssicuindittasatebintisseqaoutacibsanideeaesussadonisduadssenciacadesuaseminndsiotons 11 2 Security recepi O pass E E 11 3 PIN ANN I aa E A E AA S 11 7 Department management ssssssseerreressssesrerrerrssssesereereresssssseeeereeessssseeeeeeesssssereeeesessssee 11 13 Registering the copy charge Cost management esesssessessesrersssrerserrerserrerrsrrrresrrees 11 13 Registering department codes sssesscceovsaiaacaannswebsceveansatssectouseraretesinaboetetaaraariannatuaeian 11 14 Deleting department codes Seen etna ante ee et ee er ee 11 16 Turning department man
265. seseseessessressssrrrrrsssreerrssserreessssereessssrereesssreeresssrreessssereeee 5 9 Selecting a destination from the Address Book ccccccccccssssceeesssseecesssseceeeseeeeess 5 11 Searching for an e mail address acncssnaceracezcsavasoscciaacarsesonnneeaheovestatsvasasocietiaanergaeatenennaers 5 15 Sending a document using the mail history esseesseesessssserssseseressssrerrerssrreersssrrreessssns 5 21 IY 0 eA a A E AAE EAT E 5 22 Reviewing or changing your selected destinations sssesseressssserrsessrrresssssreessssrerresse 5 23 Adding a text message to your e mail ssesesseessresssrressreressreressrersssrersssreresseresssrresserees 5 24 AEO a TEON TE A S 5 28 Scanning documents into a folder ccccccssssscsccessssceccccsesssseccccesssseeeeceeesseeeseeseeeaes 5 28 Scanning documents using a folder shortcut eeeseeeeesseeseessseserressererrersererersssrrreessssns 5 33 Reviewing or canceling selected folders ccccccccessssscccceesssseccecessssseeeceeessseeesceesenaes 5 34 Registering or editing a folder shortcut cccccccssssccccceesssseccccesssseeeeceeessseeesceseeeaes 5 35 C A E E ET EET 5 42 Scanning documents to an FTP Servet ssseeseressssseressssrrersssererssssrreeresserreeesserrreesssens 5 42 Registering an FTP server to a shortcut eeeesesesseeseressssrerresssreresssereeessssrreessssrreeesss 5 45 Scanning documents using an FTP Shortcut eseeeseeessessseessssreresssr
266. setting is disabled To enter the energy save mode press Energy Save Energy Save Time If the machine is not used for the period of time set here it automatically switches to the energy save mode When turned ON the machine automatically prints a Tx amp Rx Report once 100 faxes and e mail have been sent or received NOTE Tx Report and Rx Report cannot be automatically printed When turned ON you can sort the report by the executed time This can make it easier to locate specific jobs and to confirm job status When turned OFF the report will be sorted by command Dallas Office General dep Account dep Fax 123 456 7890 x k Fax Transmit Journal P 1 May 5 2005 02 15pm No Name Fax No Mode Start Time Note 09 24 13 31 09 24 13 33 09 24 13 32 Time Page Department Result 0 22 0 0 12 1 0 12 1 001 New York Office 003 New York Office 002 Chicago Office T 4 1 0 K 0 K Normal Normal Normal You can register the protect passcode required for using the security functions To change the protect code you must enter the old one first Enter 0000 to delete the protect passcode 12 12 MACHINE SETTINGS OFF Low Middle High e Fax High Mid Low e Copy High Mid Low e Scanner High Mid Low OFF ON OFF Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 ON OFF 1 to 100 minutes 5 minutes ON OFF See Printing journal report automatically on page 13 6 No protect pass
267. sion Carefully reset the document into the feeder and re try the call The telephone line disconnected during transmission because of exces sive modem errors or because the remote unit ran out of paper Try the call again After transmission began poor line conditions developed Try the call again Poor line conditions prevented transmission Try the call again ECM transmission failed perhaps due to line noise Conditions can change rapidly so try the call again later A compatibility error occurred Line noise or other problems prevented line probing The remote fax machine didn t complete the equalizer training phase MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 25 i MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING AS Machine errors Suggested solutions The display shows nothing Check that the power switch is turned on and the keys are not working The machine is not activated Check that the power cord is connected properly when the power switch is turned on The machine beeps and shows See Displayed error messages on page 14 16 an error message Documents jam frequently e Check for the ADF cover is closed properly e If there is a foreign matter in the ADF remove it e Ensure that the document is an acceptable weight See Document han dling page 1 24 e Clean the ADF rollers see page 14 3 Paper Jams Frequently e Ensure that the paper is an acceptable weight See Paper handling page 1 26 Fa
268. splay will appear Open amp Close Scanner Cover Reset your document Also if a document jam occurs during a quick memory transmission or real time transmission the following message will print and detail which page has jammed May 5 2005 02 15pm Error on scanned page 3 Case 2 If a document jams while scanning into memory for sort copy or normal memory transmission the machine will show set 07 Memory gpg Ifyou want to continue the operation press Yes and proceed to step 2 To abort the operation press No NOTE If the machine is left idle for 3 minutes the machine will abort the operation automatically MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING 14 9 g MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Aas 2 The machine will show which page i e which page number is jammed Clear the document jam and reset the document in the ADF you do not need to start the entire job over simply start with the page that was jammed then press Start Continue storing Jam Recover set the document Press Start From Page 2 NOTE If the machine is left idle for 3 minutes the machine will begin to send or copy the document s it has stored in memory e If you wish to cancel this operation press Stop The machine will delete the entire job that was stored in memory and then return to the standby mode 14 10 MAINTENANCE amp TROUBLESHOOTING Jam in the document feeder Open the ADF cover 2 G
269. sssccesssecsscesssseeeees 2 21 The address book You can register up to 300 frequently used destinations into the address book The destination name fax number and e mail address can be registered into the address book You can also add these destinations into a group In addition you can simply search the destination name registered in the address book NOTE e For details on registering or deleting destinations in address book see page 2 4 e For details on address book dialing see How to dial using the address book on page 2 12 e For details on call group dialing see page 2 14 e For details on phone calling see page 2 19 The address book display When you press the All tab in the address book display all the registered destina tions will be displayed Press the Fax tab to show only the fax numbers that have been registered and the e mail tab to show only the e mail addresses that have been registered The displayed soft keys change depending on the tab you select The order of dis played keys after pressing Others also changes but the item description remain the same Search Press this to search Fax Ready Mode a destination s fax number or e mail ad dress See page 5 15 Add Edit Memory 100 Press this to register a destination into the Gearch ale Lact address book or edit lado Trea mon Sam New York Office in existing destina 10n kornal B01 Sanflew York
270. sssseeeesssreeeesse 10 7 Deleting a Macro Key ccccccssscccceesssscecccessssceeccecsseeeeceeessseeeccessssseeeceeceseeeeeeeeegs 10 10 Changing the Macro key speed ccsccccccssssssssccsssssscsccenssssesscccesseceeeecesssseeessceseees 10 11 Editing macro key titles ccccccccccccssssscccccessssscceccesssseeeeceeessseeeccesssseeeceeeeseeeseeeeegs 10 12 Executing a Macro command sssssssrresssserresssrrersssssreressssrereessrrreresserereesssereeessssreeese 10 13 Program one one e aa A i EEE EAE a 10 14 Registering or editing a program one t0uCh esssssesseressssrerressereeresserreesssesrreessssreeese 10 14 Deleting a program one touch ssssssrrssesserresssrrersssssreressssrereessreeresserreesssserreesssereeese 10 19 How to use a program one touch sssessesssssserressserersssssreressssrereessrreeressereeesssesreeessssreeese 10 20 TYCO CIS OK Teal OTE ionien S E E AEE 10 21 F code introductio i ssiri ain ani 10 21 Registering or editing an F code DX ccccessssccccessssccesceeesssseecccesssseeeceeessseeeeeeeeees 10 21 Printing a list of F code DOR CS is 1cs 0ecaceniseseseuraedositenndcensbudesueenadensbentaudsboutaraseuanedeomaenese 10 30 Printing a list of documents stored in F code boxes ccceesscccecessssceeceeessseeeeeeeeens 10 30 Deleting an empty F code D0X cccssscccccessssscecceessseeeceseesseeeccesssseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeees 10 30 Storing a document in a bulletin DOX ssssssese
271. st every fax transmission and attempt on the activity journal For example if your machine has to redial a call the redials will appear on the journal If you want to list those activities by the executed time you can change the order on the activity journal To change the order Press Setting Management Next Journal Line Up Management select item to edit Prev 2of 3b Nex Journal Line Up Protect Passcode Depart Management Display Jobs in Queue Copy Protect DFF 2 Select ON or OFF Management Select ON OFF and press Enter Journal Line Wp Back Enter The machine will print the activity journal based on the assigned number If you want the activity journal to print listing the transmissions by the executed time press ON Otherwise The machine lists the fax transaction per command 3 Press Enter REPORT amp Lists 13 7 REPORT amp LISTS WW Transmission confirmation report Setting the transmission confirmation report Your machine can print a transmit confirmation report TCR after sending a fax or internet fax to any Group 3 fax machine The TCR lists the following information for each communication e Date and time of the TCR s printout Destination to send fax or internet fax e Resolution mode e Starting date and time e Number of pages e Sending results of fax internet fax e Any special operations For example BrdCast will appea
272. step press Back e To return to the first screen press Root amp Ifthe user name and password are required to login to the file server enter UserName and Password SCANNING oO Cancel Password e Press User Name then enter the user name and press Enter Refer to page 5 30 step 10 for more information e Press Password then enter the password and press Enter O Select the file you want to attach by touching it It will become highlighted File Navigation Select attachment filets and ue s Enter A L OF Bem Sen 2b A STAFF Le Shared Figo ument 1 doc E of 2 E finaze bn j a Rvorksheet 1 xls J sls ooo To review the document properties press the 2J located next to the file 10 Press Enter SCANNING 5 65 To attach more files press Browse and repeat steps 5 to 10 Otherwise proceed to step 12 File Attachment iles wi uh a attached to the Tx fil Memory 100 ff STAFFS Shared Document 1 doc 12 To remove attachments select the file you want to remove and press Delete 13 Press Enter 5 66 SCANNING Chapter Reviewing or canceling commands Reviewing or canceling commands ccccccessssscsceessssssceessstsesceessaees 6 2 To review or cancel a command ccccccessssssceeeccesessssseeeeeceesens 6 2 Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast cccccsesseceeesnees 6 4 Printing a delayed command list vesivetesoceeav
273. t Setting the scanning contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive lightness or darkness as the case may be of the document pages you are sending To change the scanning contrast Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Contrast 3 Select one of the contrast types Fay Re ady Fas Ready Mode ddjust the contrast and select Enter amrai A Normal Lighter Darker Lighest Darkest 4 Press Enter NOTE You can change the default setting for Contrast See Accessing the default settings on page 12 4 Sending method The following four sending methods are available on your machine Memory transmission For a normal memory transmission your machine 1 scans the entire document into memory 2 dials the other fax machine and 8 transmits the document Quick memory transmission For a quick memory transmission your machine doesn t wait to scan all pages into memory before dialing After it scans the first page of your document your machine will dial the other fax machine When it makes contact your machine transmits the stored document from memory while at the same time scanning the remaining pages of your document into memory The quick memory transmission is defaulted to ON However you can turn the defaut to OFF See Fax settings on page 12 4 FAXING 3 3 Real time transmission In the following cases the machine doesn t use memory for fax sendin
274. t Mode 1 use the star method Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Specify the destination If the destination was specified using the numeric keys proceed to step 4 If the destination was specified using the address book the transmission will begin When you use the address book to specify a destination or multiple destina tions proceed to step 6 To register an address book for transmission the PIN needs to be registered in advance 4 Enter the phone number press star and enter the PIN number The PIN number always follows the fax number For example to dial 67778889 with a PIN of 12845678 enter 67778889 12345678 Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Enter the recipient s fax number and select Enter Fax Number 667 18889 12345618_ e 5 Press Enter 6 Press Start Q If you select Mode 2 the display will show the proper procedure Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby made 3 Specify the destination If the destination was specified using the numeric keys and or address book number proceed to step 4 If you specify multiple destinations proceed to step 4 If the destination was specified using the address book proceed to step 5 4 Press Start 11 10 RESTRICTING USE OF THE MACHINE 5 Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN number Press Reset to cancel the settings Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Enter PIN PINS Back Ente
275. t be entered To register NetBIOS characters other than the alphabet and numbers between 1 to 9 Invalid I D code The F code box I D code you entered is not valid Try re entering your F code box I D code Invalid number number You You entered a number which is not valid for the current operation a number which is not valid for the current You entered a number which is not valid for the current operation Invalid Paper Size The selected paper is not suitable for duplex printing Select other paper source Select plain paper in the size of Letter or Legal Invalid parameters You entered an invalid value or pressed Enter without entering a value The advanced search failed due to an internal machine error Check the LDAP server setting and try the search again For more information about LDAP server set up refer to the Network Guide Jam Recover You selected to continue the job The machine is instructing you from which page to set Set the document Press the document Set the document again from that page that the machine is indicating Start you and press Start To cancel and finish the job press Cancel From Page Start Cancel Lamp error Call for The scanner lamp is dim or not operating service Make repeated copies to help evaporate any internal moisture If that doesn t resolve the problem contact your Muratec dealer LDAP reference execu The advanced search failed due to an internal mac
276. t key according your needs See Soft key on page 10 2 Press this to display the various scan functions Host Press this to enter the FTP server s link Used to save the scanned image to your desired FTP server Add Edit Adds or edits the FTP server shortcuts 1 8 GETTING STARTED Key displays and functions LI Keys on the display To set a function press this key to open the setting display Some keys switch ON OFF by simply touching them When another setting is required to be set first or when the function cannot be combined with another function the key will be erayed out and cannot be selected Also the selected key will be highlighted Doc Type Setti etting option Auto lt When a key cannot be selected gt lt Before selection gt lt After selection gt lt gt Fhoto O Cursor keys Prev amp Next Page Up amp Page Down These keys are used when entering numbers or selecting functions They are also used when changing displays lt Number Entry gt lt Display Change gt Times Prev lot 2 Next ire oe IT Q Back Cancel Enter Back Goes back to the previous menu level Cancel Returns you to the default display without resetting previously regis tered functions Enter Sets the function or number specified on the display Cancel GETTING STARTED 1 9 GETTING STARTED Entering characters QWERTY keypad Name Enter the conta
277. t of documents stored in F code boxes 10 30 Deleting an empty F code DOK ccccccccccssssscceesesseeceessseeeeeens 10 30 Storing a document in a bulletin box i cceeeecesseseeeeeeens 10 31 Printing stored documents a missvsecscavsetcndentansdanidecseeveeessoavsendeane 10 33 Deleting stored documents eeseseesssesseerressssreeeressssserrrssssesrreees 10 35 Sending a document using a subaddress and password 10 37 Polling a document using a subaddress and password 10 38 VIEWING the page COUN LETS vaciccecssessnisonsercesncwssazsdueagassaeanssiwapwotiendesnsoats 10 39 Checking the number of printed pages ccccsssceceesssseeeeeees 10 39 Soft keys The soft key is a shortcut key By assigning frequently used functions to a soft key you can perform instant recall of this feature The five soft keys can be displayed on the standby mode You can program the soft keys for the copy fax and scanner displays Also the fax and scanner displays have multiple tabs on the bottom of the display that toggle between fax e mail folder etc Each of these tabs can contain its own set of soft keys Example of Copy standby mode set 01 Memory 1002 Soft key 1 Autoja Norma lj Soft key 2 Soft key 3 Soft key 4 Soft key 5 Soft key functions The following table lists the functions you can assign to a soft key Copy mode C p 1 This function is for MF
278. tch Tx Box Delete 2 Press the batch transmission box you want to delete 3 When the confirmation message appears press Yes to delete 3 40 FAXING Specifying the document scanning size If the document is longer than the set width only the scanned area will be sent Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others Scan Size NOTE You can assign Scan Size to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 4 Select the scan size Fax Functions Select the scanning size and press Enter Scan Size Back Enter 5 Press Enter twice 6 Specify the destination e Use the numeric keys to dial the number _or e Enter the e mail address manually See page 4 2 _or e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 _or e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page 3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 If you specify the destination using the address book the transmission will begin If you specify it by another method proceed to step 7 To clear this setting press Reset 7 Press Start FAXING 3 41 Polling transmission Polling transmission allows someone to retrieve a document stored in your machine s memory The stored document will be sent when the other party calls you Storing a document for polling Set the document 2 Press Setting Store Doc Settings 3 Press Store
279. te Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Doc Box Doc Doc Select the F code box that contains the document s you want to delete e C indicates that there are documents stored in the box Bulletin Box Doc Select document and press Enter 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the I D code 4 digits if it has been set Bulletin Box Doc Enter D Code SPECIAL FEATURES 10 35 SPECIAL FEATURES 5 O 4 Select the applicable file number Select All stored documents to delete every document stored in this file Bulletin Box Doc Prev lof 6m Next Oi Already stored 5 Press Yes to delete Bulletin Box Doc O1l Already stored Would you like to delete 10 36 SPECIAL FEATURES Sending a document using a subaddress and password Entering sub addresses and passwords enables F code security box transmissions and F code bulletin box transmissions to be performed NOTE First check the sub address and password for each function registered on the remote machine Set the document See page 1 25 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Press Others Next F Code Tx NOTE You can assign F Code Tx to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the sub address of the remote machine and then press Enter Fax Functions Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub address and select Enter F Code Tx Sub dddress
280. te e SCAN e mail Others Attachment e SCAN Folder Browse e SCAN Folder Add Edit Number selection Link e SCAN Folder Others Attachment e SCAN FTP Others Attachment e Setting Scanner Settings Folder Shortcut Add Edit Number selec tion Link 7 Press Start to finish the entry 10 8 SPECIAL FEATURES NOTE The following display will appear when you press Start Fax Ready a Ready Mode Select Location ta contirm delete re t To 002 Mike London Office ition TA ELT Recoluti Valin ll l Press Yes to register the operation including the Start command Press No to register the operation but exclude the Start command You can use this function as follows Press No while registering the sending operation to exclude Start in the Macro command When the Macro command is selected all the registered steps will run but you will need to manually select Start to begin job execution This allows you to perform other setting adjustments in addition to the Macro com mands Tf you press Yes and include Start in the Macro command the fax and Internet fax will be sent Therefore such settings as delayed transmissions cannot be set 8 Enter the title e The title can contain up to 60 characters e For details on character entry see page 1 10 Macro Name Name the macro key and select Enter Entry Limit 07 BO Cancel Macro Name
281. tec America Inc QuadAccess is registered trademark of Muratec America Inc All other products referenced are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective com panies This manual and any updates to it can be found online at www muratec com Go to the Products section of this site then click on MFX 2030 or MFX 1430 or F 560 or F 520 Welcome Thank you for choosing the Muratec MFX 2030 MFX 1430 F 560 F 520 This User Manual describes the functions operating procedures precautions and basic troubleshooting for the Muratec MFX 2030 MFX 1430 F 560 F 520 Before using this machine be sure to read the User Manual thoroughly in order to ensure that you use the machine efficiently After you have gone through the manual keep it handy at all times Note that some of the illustrations of the machine used in the User Manual may be different from what you actually see on your machine The Manual There are five manuals for this machine The description for each manual is as follows Quick Reference Guide Explains most frequently used functions and how to clean paper jams User Guide Explains all the functions of your machine and the infor mation of maintenance Network Guide Explains about network settings Local Printer and Scanner Manual CD Explains how to install the drivers and the information of print driver properties etc Network Printer Manual CD Explains
282. ter This mode allows you to reduce the amount of paper used receiving Taxes The duplex printing unit is required to use the Duplex Rx function 4 Press Enter 5 Press Reset to return to the standby mode 3 22 FAXING Advanced fax functions The table below lists the advanced functions that can be used in the Fax mode To select the advanced fax functions Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 2 Press Others 3 Press Prev or Next and select the desired function See the pages indicated for detailed information NOTE You can assign a function that you frequently use to a soft key for instant recall See page 10 2 Advanced function Broadcast Redial Monitor Address Book Fax Forward Fax amp Copy Group Tx Security Rx TI TTI Select Cover Page Tx Report Delayed Tx Batch Tx Scan Size Polling F Code Polling F Code Tx Overseas Tx Memory Tx Dialing Options Descriptions Use this to send a fax to multiple destinations Specify the destination to resend a fax Obtains a dial tone for on hook dialing Use this when specifying the destination by address book number Enable or disable fax forwarding Enable or disable Fax amp Copy Select the group to make a group transmission Enable or disable secure reception Enable or disable TTI sending Select the TTI to use Select whether or not to attach a cover page Prints the transmit confirmation report
283. ter Letter Frint Cassi Eet 2 Press Setting separate Reception Page Select item to edit Fress Enter to continue 3 Select the mode To set the separator page ON select ON and proceed to step 4 To set it OFF select OFF and skip to step 7 Separate Reception Page Select ON OFF and press Enter FAXING 3 57 4 Press Enter 5 1 Press Separator Cassette NOTE Paper sources will only appear on the control panel if they have been installed 2 Select the separator page paper source Separate Reception Page Please select th sette used for the header page Separator Cassette Back Jj Enter Tray 3 Press Enter 6 1 Press Prt On Separator Pg 2 Determine if the separator page will have the first page printed on it or whether it should be left blank Separate Reception Page Select ON OFF and press Enter Print On Separator Page The first page of the received document will print on the separator page If you want the seperator page to be left blank select OFF If you want to print the first page of the received document on the separator page select ON Separator page separates each received document Print on the separator page OFF Print on the separator page ON 7 Press Enter to save the settings To return to the standby mode press Reset 3 58 FAXING Chapter Internet Fax functions Parore cendi ee E ee N 4 2 Sending an e ma
284. ter OFF ont Ue Duplexscan Batch Scanff i leFormat File Name Address e mai Mail e Name Book Subject History 3 Folder NOTE You can assign File Name to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 4 Enter the file name File Name Enter the file name and select Enter Entry Limit To use a pre registered file name proceed to step 5 Otherwise skip to step 8 NOTE You cannot enter a space as the first letter of the file name e The characters available for the file name are alphabetical numeral and special characters listed as below e Avairable special characters SCANNING 5 Press List File Name Enter the file name and select Enter Entry Limit i 02 Document O3 Scanned maze 04 ABCDEFG SCANNING a 7 Edit the name if needed File Name Enter the file name and select Enter Entry Limit 10 20 8 Press Enter NOTE To use the pre registered fine names the names should be entered in advance See Registering or editing file names next page how to register file names SCANNING 5 7 Registering or editing file names NOTE You can register up to 10 file names Press Setting 2 Press Scanner Settings sett ings Select item to edit ey Broun ee Doc Book aoe settings settings a a settings 3 Press File Name 4 To register a new file name select an empty key To edit a file name select the desired file name to edit File
285. the print reduction rate for fax reception Auto Automatically reduces printouts at variable rates down to a mini mum of 50 Tries to reduce printouts to fit on one sheet of the selected paper size If it cannot reduce the document to fit on one page the image will print at 100 size on two or more pages Does not reduce documents Due to the sender s TTI this may print two pages when receiving a one page fax document Reduction margin Your machine s reduction margin is measured in inches in We will define reduc tion margin by explaining how it is used When a fax message enters your machine s memory the machine measures the message length and compares it to a the length of your selected paper not includ ing the print margins plus b the reduction margin you set If the length of the incoming message is shorter than a plus b your machine will print the message on one sheet If it is longer your machine will print the message on two or more sheets An Auto reduction setting and a reduction margin setting of 1 5 in will print most incoming faxes as single pages Try this combination first and if it does not work select a different setting 3 20 FAXING Paper save function O Half page reception Half page reception can conserve paper if some of the faxes you receive are half page Memo sized messages When activated this feature tells the machine to combine two of these half page receptions on
286. tion that has been specified See page 3 26 5 Press Tx Time 001 Sam New York Offic Select item to edit Press Enter to continue Fax No d001 Sam New York Office Ts Time 01 172 00am Bos Name FAXING 3 35 6 Enter the sending day and time 2 001 Sam New York Offic Use the numeric keypad or cursor keys to input the Tx time and select Enter Transmission Time 0 02 15 Le J Day Hour Minute Enter UO if you do not want to set day NOTE Use A V1 lt 4 gt Jor the numeric keys to enter the sending time e Add 0 in front of one digit numbers E g 9 gt 09 e Enter 00 for the day to send the stored documents at the same time every day 7 Press Enter 8 Enter the batch box name 1 Press Box Name NOTE Up to 24 characters can be entered e For details on character entry see page 1 10 2 Enter the box name Box Name Enter the box name and select Enter Entry Limit 2 H 3 After you entered the name press Enter 3 36 FAXING Q A list of the entered information is displayed 10 To register another batch transmission box press Enter then repeat from step 3 NOTE The contents settings for batch transmission boxes that contain any docu ments cannot be changed To edit the settings of a batch transmission box you have regis tered Select the box you want to edit and then edit the contents by overwriting or del
287. tions select item to edit a tof 2b text pP A Monitor wra Hu E T Batch Tx E lt a When All tab is selected NOTE You can assign FaxForward to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 2 4 Fax forwarding is now set Press Reset to return to the standby mode 3 52 FAXING Registering or editing a transfer rule You can create up to 5 transfer rules NOTE When your machine is connected to the network you cannot register edit or delete the transfer rules from the machines control panel Use a web browser to register edit or delete the transfer rules For details on registering and editing the transfer rules using the Browser see the Network Guide Press Setting Fax Settings Fax Forward 2 Press Enter Edit Fax Forward Select item to edit Enter Edit 3 Select a number to register a forwarding rule Enter Edit select the forwarding location to enter edit e Press 01 when registering for the first time e To change a transfer rule already registered select the number you want to edit 4 1 Enter the forwarding destination Fax Forwarding Sem Eea select forwarding location by the numeric keypad or a Add Book and press Enter FAXING 3 53 NOTE You can specify using the numeric keys the address book the call group e You can register multiple destinations up to 308 destinations 300 address book numbers and 3 specified using the
288. to a single sheet Half page reception only combines half page messages sent back to back during the same transmission It won t combine two half page faxes from separate transmis sions O Duplex reception Duplex reception can save paper by duplexing received faxes When activated this feature tells the machine to combine and print inbound docu ments two up The duplex printing unit is required To adjust the print settings Press Setting Fax Settings Other Settings Next Other Settings select item to edit EY lof of Enter Redial Attempts 2 Times Redial Interval 1 Min Prev O When you set the reception reduction rate Default setting Auto 2 Press Rx Reduction Ratel 3 Select the reduction rate Other Settings select the Be reduction rate and press Enter Rx Reduction Rate Back Enter 4 Press Enter FAXING 3 21 O When you set the reduction margin Default setting 1 5 in 2 Press Reduction Margin 3 Use A YV or the numeric keys to enter the reduction margin Other Settings Use the arrows or numeric keypad to select the margin and press Enter Reduction Margin Back Enter Input range 0 0 3 3 E LE 4 Press Enter O When you set the paper save function Default setting OFF 2 Press Paper Saving 3 Select the paper save function Other Settings select the paper save setting and press Enter Paper Saving Back En
289. to make any adjustments click Properties For details refer to the Network Printer Manual on the CD supplied with your machine 5 Click Print The Fax Transmission Settings dialog will appear NOTE To display the Fax Transmission Settings a Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer should be installed on your computer A OfficeBridge Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help P x E A Ss Search se Favorites A Media 4 va ee 5 Address http 200 1 37 99 FAXLOGIN HTM SERVICE 00000004 Edit vE co Links Fax Transmission Settings Not Selected x Address Book To Not Selected Y E mail Destination i i i Address Book Fax Destination E mail Template Edit E mail Template b Document Send document as O PDF TIFF S TIFF Not Attached Cover Page O Attached Advanced Settings Set Advanced Features A Done Internet 6 Specify the destination and click Send NOTE For more information on PC faxing refer to the Network Printer Manual on the CD supplied with your machine PC FAx FUNCTION 8 3 PC FAX FUNCTION 8 4 PC F Ax FUNCTION Chapter PC printing PTA Se TS the drie cers te stone na E r ia 9 2 Printing a document from the PC cccecccccssssccceessssseceesssseeeseessaees 9 3 Your machine can be used as a printer either locally through the USB port or through the netw
290. ts you do not have to do this manually 5 62 SCANNING Broadcasting Using this key you can simultaneously send document to multiple destinations NOTE Broadcasting is available for e mail and folders or for FTP servers You can not broadcast a document to an e mail address or a folder and an FTP server together One broadcast can handle all 300 Address Book entries as well as 30 manually entered locations for total of 330 locations A broadcast can handle either 5 folder locations or 5 FTP servers Set the document 2 Press SCAN on the control panel 3 Press e mail Folder or FTP 4 Press Others 5 Press Broadcast and toggle the switch to ON scan Functions Select item to edit SCANNING a Program 1002 Letter OFF DuplexScan Batch Scan FileFormat Address e mai Mai o NOTE You can assign Broadcast to the soft key See Soft keys on page 10 4 6 Press Enter 7 Ifyou select a destination from address book or a folder FTP shortcut that location will be highlighted on the display 8 To review or cancel a destination s press Location If you want to cancel a destination s select the destination s you want to remove and press Delete For more information about this display see pages 5 23 5 34 and 5 48 Q When all the desired destinations are selected press Start SCANNING 5 63 Attaching additional files to the scanned document In addition to the document you
291. umeric keys to dial the number _or e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 Press Monitor on hang up the handset to cancel the settings NOTE You can dial only one destination for manual transmission 7 When you hear fax tones from the remote fax machine press Start If a person answers the phone use the handset to tell that person that you are trying to send a fax When you hear fax tones press Start If the call fails when you use Monitor to dial press Monitor to hang up If you are using the handset hang up after pressing Start eTo cancel the transmission use the Review Commands feature See Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands FAXING 3 9 Changing Document Scan in Mid Scan Mixed Transmission The document glass or the ADF can scan the document Both scanning devices can be used in combination such as for a cover page and map and transmitted at the same time NOTE Basics for scanning the next document e To scan the next document set the Next Doc setting to Yes while scanning the current document e The ADF s default setting for Next Doc is No To have the next document scanned press Yes while scanning the current document e For the document glass the default setting for Next Doc is set to Yes o If you set Next Doc to No during scanning the transmission will begin after scanning is completed ADF gt Document glass 1 2 3 10 FAX
292. urrent communication is com pleted Transmission can be reserved for up to 100 communications o If the call fails see Redialing on page 3 13 FAXING 3 5 Sending a fax using the document glass Set the document on the document glass See page 1 25 for details 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode 3 Adjust the scanning resolution and contrast if necessary See page 3 2 4 Set the various functions if necessary 5 Specify the destination Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode 1 26 2005 02 15pm Ep eA EE Horma ljg cera M001 Sam New York Office F Normal 4 E001 Sam New York Office OFF AS History F e Use the numeric keys to dial the number e Specify the destination using the address book See page 2 12 e When specifying multiple destinations use broadcast transmission See page 3 24 or call group dialing See page 2 14 Press Reset to cancel the settings 6 Press Start If you specify the destination using the address book no need to press Start Memory 100 RAO01 Sam New York Office RAOO Mike London Office Fage 001 Doc Size Letter e Pressing No during document scanning will start the fax transmission of all documents when the scan has been completed 7 When scanning has been completed set the next document 3 6 FAXING 8 Press Next Doc The scanning of the next document will begin Set next document Set documents and press Start ne Hemi rY at Co
293. ush your eyes with water and seek medical assistance Legal restrictions on copying Certain types of documents cannot be duplicated with the intent to pass copies of such docu ments off as the originals The following is not a complete list but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying Financial instruments e Personal checks e Travelers checks e Money orders e Certificates of deposit e Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness e Stock certificates Legal documents e Food stamps e Postage stamps canceled or uncanceled e Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies e Internal revenue stamps canceled or uncanceled e Passports e Immigration papers e Motor vehicle licenses and titles o House and property titles and deeds General e Identification cards badges or insignias e Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies or works of art without permission of the copyright owner If you are unsure about the legal restrictions regarding the duplication of a document consult with legal counsel I 9 Caution labels The caution labels are attached to the machine as shown below to avoid any serious injury A CAUTION CUIDADO Z VORSICHT ATTENZIONE A ATTENTION AHR A PRECAUCI N Hia AN RA 27 Hot area HeiBer Bereich Partie chaude Zona caliente Area quente Parte calda lile
294. ute intervals You can change this setting see Fax setting on page 12 4 Fax Ready Auto Redial sep 26 pes horna Ce Norma li I 001 Sam New York Office F E 001 Sam New York Office If the last redial attempt fails the following message will be displayed and also the error message will automatically print Check the message and transmit again Fax Ready Fax Ready Mode Communication error Check Message Printing Reso ut ior earch Add Edit OFMma lig contrat M001 Sam New York Office F Normal I E001 San New York Office Broadcast jg OFF F W002 Mike London Office Redial 002 Mike London Office EA M003 Carl Paris Office History J others NOTE If you want to end the redial procedures delete the redial command of it from _ the command list See Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands Manual redialing The last 10 numbers for fax transmissions phone calls are kept in memory Set the document 2 Press FAX to display the Fax standby mode FAXING 3 13 3 Press Redial Fay Ready Fax Ready Mode Memory 100 Resolution earch dd Edit Norma li Contrast HO01 Sam New York Office it korma Yi O01 San New York Office Broadcast ff T OFFS 002 Mike London Office 0 Iadi z a IEMs O02 Mike London Office Hail A anne ea RAO03 Carl Paris Office own When All tab is selected 4 Select the fax number you want to redial Redial
295. ver answers the calls automatically You must answer each call as described in Answering calls manually page 3 17 You will need e An optional handset or an external phone connection FAXING 3 15 Automatic reception mode Fax Ready Mode Use it if Your machine uses its own phone line and doesn t share it with a phone or an answering machine In this mode Your machine answers each call and attempts to receive a fax Tel Fax Ready Mode Use it if e You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls e You are using the machine as both a fax machine and a telephone but its primary use will be as a telephone In this mode Your machine will ring the set number of times the default setting is twice If you don t answer the call while ringing your machine will answer the call auto matically If a caller sends a fax your machine will begin to receive it If a voice call comes in your machine will alert you with a special ring prompting you to pick up the handset The telephone connected to your machine will not ring You will need e An optional handset or an external phone connection Fax Tel Ready Mode Use it if e You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls e You are using the machine as both a fax machine and a telephone but its primary use will be for faxing In this mode Your machine receives faxes silently but also alerts you when a regular voice call comes in Your m
296. will return to the standby mode You can save the settings you have made by selecting Enter as shown below Press Setting 2 Press User Install sett ings select item to edit Book Entry Settings Settings Copy Fax scanner Mail Settings Settings Settings Settings User 3 The user install list is displayed User Instal l Select item to edit Prev lof 2m Next Language English Time Setting 2005 01701 12 00am Set Daylight Saving OFF Broadcast OFF Comm Line Reception Mode Fax Ready Mode 4 Set the desired settings See page 1 17 to 1 22 5 After setting all the items press Reset to return to the standby mode Print out the Fax Settings List from the List menu to insure that your set tings are correct See page 12 4 1 16 GETTING STARTED Language Select the machine s display language English French or Spanish The selected language will be applied to the list printouts as well Press Language Languages available to use is displayed 2 Select the language 3 Press Enter to save the setting NOTE Some versions do not support the language conversion Date amp Time Set the current time in the order of year 4 digits month 2 digits day 2 digits hour 12 hour clock 2 digits and minutes 2 digits Press Time Setting 2 Use A V lt lt gt or the numeric keys to enter the current date and time User Install Enter the
297. x 15 4 lines mm Otherwise the superfine resolution is 8 dots mm x 15 4 lines mm Grayscale 8 dots mm x 7 7 lines mm 600 dpi x 300 lpi or 600 dpi x 600 lpi 8 5 in 216 mm MFX 2030 F 560 20 ppm MFX 1430 F 520 14 ppm Using Letter sized paper in 1st paper cassette Automatic document feeder 25 to 100 Document glass 25 to 400 Automatic document feeder 100 78 64 50 Document glass 154 129 121 100 78 64 50 The document glass is available for MFX 2030 and MFX 1430 600 dpi MFX 2030 F 560 20 ppm MFGX 1430 F 520 14 ppm Using Letter sized paper in 1st paper cassette Monochrome Windows 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 XP English version Windows server 2003 English version GDI standard PCL option USB port Ethernet port APPENDIX amp INDEX AI 3 APPENDIX amp INDEX B H Scanner Color Mono Color or Monochrome Scanning resolution Scanning width Consumable items MFX 2030 MFX 1430 Drum cartridge life Toner cartridge life Color 600 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 100 dpi Monochorme 600 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 8 2 in 208 mm Approx 30 000 pages Approx 16 000 pages Starter toner cartridge life Approx 3 000 pages Based on 6 document coverage and letter sized two page interval printing F 560 F 520 Drum cartridge life Toner cartridge life Approx 20 000 pages Approx 15 000 pages Starter toner cartridge life Approx 4 000
298. xing errors Suggested solutions Cannot send Check that the phone line is connected properly Check that the number or the e mail address stored in your address book is correct Make sure that the machine is in fax mode If not change to the mode to the fax mode by pressing FAX Check that the network cable is connected properly Check that the network setting is made up properly Cannot stop transmission Your machine cannot cancel a transmission by pressing Stop To cancel a trans mission press Fax Cancel Job Confirm and select a job you want to cancel then press Enter See Chapter 6 Reviewing or canceling commands for more details Cannot receive automatically Check that the phone line is connected properly Check that the machine is in the automatic receiving mode page 3 16 The memory may be full If there is no paper in the cassette set a paper to print the received document stored in the memory Cannot receive manually Make sure that the external phone is attached to your machine to receive a fax manually In manual receive mode you must press Start before you hang up the phone The memory may be full If there is no paper in the cassette set paper Cannot store a document into Make sure that the machine is in fax mode If not change to the mode to the memory fax mode by pressing FAX The memory may be full If there is no paper in the cassette set the paper to print the received docume
299. y standby mode 3 Press Others DuplexCopy NOTE You can assign DuplexCopy to the soft key See Soft keys on pages 10 2 to 10 6 4 Press 1 gt 2 sided Copy Functions select the duplex copy method and press Enter Duplex Cony Method OFF 2 gt si ded 2 gt sided OT a ii e If you set an advanced function proceed to step 5 e If you do not set an advanced function proceed to step 7 5 Press Advance 6 1 Press Bind to set the binding position e Press DuplexCopy to return to the duplex copy display DuplexCopy Adjust settings and select Enter To go back select DuplexCopy l gt 2sided Doc Direction COPYING 7 23 COPYING B 2 Press Right amp Left or Top DuplexCopy select the document bind position and press Enter ee Heulen 3 Press Enter 7 Press Enter twice to return to the standby mode Press Reset to cancel the duplex copy settings 8 Press Start Q Press Yes while the document is being scanned PrintPages 1 Copies 17 1 Memory qq Hest doc Yes Selecting No will cause one sided document output 10 After the document has been scanned set the next document Press Next Doc Set next document Set next doc Memory qq e The Next Doc setting can be deleted by pressing Complete e To scan another document press Yes while the document is being scanned 7 24 COPYING Card Copy The front a

2Wire 8113P487-60 Two-Way Radio User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents